Mercedes Benz Automobile 2002 SL 500 User Manual

SL  
Operator’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Our company and staff congratulate you on the purchase of your new Mercedes-Benz.  
Your selection of our product is a demonstration of your trust in our company name. Further, it exemplifies your desire  
to own an automobile that will be as easy as possible to operate and provide years of service.  
Your Mercedes-Benz represents the efforts of many skilled engineers and craftsmen. To ensure your pleasure of  
ownership, and for your safety and that of your passengers, we ask you to make a small investment of your time:  
• Please read this manual carefully before putting it aside. Then return it to your vehicle where it will be handy for  
your reference.  
• Please abide by the recommendations contained in this manual. They are designed to acquaint you with the  
operation of your Mercedes-Benz.  
• Please abide by the warnings and cautions contained in this manual. They are designed to help improve the safety  
of the vehicle operator and occupants.  
We extend our best wishes for many miles of safe, pleasurable driving.  
DaimlerChrysler AG  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Choosing global or  
selective mode on  
Seat belts and integrated  
Introduction  
restraint system ..........................52  
Seat belts ...........................................52  
Seat belt nonusage  
warning system ............................53  
Fastening of seat belts .................54  
BabySmartTM airbag  
Product information .......................... 7  
Operator’s manual ............................. 8  
Where to find it ................................ 13  
Problems with your vehicle ........... 14  
Reporting Safety Defects ................ 15  
remote control ...............................31  
Opening the trunk ........................31  
Panic button ................................. 32  
Start lock-out .................................... 33  
General notes on the  
central locking system ............... 33  
deactivation system ....................58  
Doors ................................................. 34 Self-test BabySmartTM  
Instruments and controls  
without special child  
seat installed ................................58  
Supplemental restraint  
system (SRS) ................................59  
Emergency tensioning  
retractor (ETR) .............................59  
Airbags ..............................................60  
Front airbags ................................62  
Side impact airbags .....................62  
Safety guidelines for the  
seat belt, emergency tensioning  
retractor and airbag .....................67  
Infant and child  
Central locking switch .................... 36  
Automatic central locking .......... 37  
Emergency unlocking in case of  
accident ........................................ 38  
Trunk ................................................. 38  
Trunk lid release switch ................ 39  
Trunk lid emergency release ........ 40  
Power windows .................................41  
Antitheft alarm system ................... 42  
Tow-away alarm ............................... 43  
Power seats ....................................... 44  
Storing position in memory ....... 46  
Backrest ............................................ 48  
Multicontour seats .......................... 49  
Seat heater ........................................ 50  
Instruments and controls ............... 18  
Door control panel .......................20  
Overhead control panel ...............21  
Dashboard .....................................22  
Center console ..............................24  
Operation  
Vehicle keys ......................................28  
Remote control with  
folding master key .......................28  
Central locking system ...................29  
Remote control .............................29  
restraint systems ..........................68  
Adjusting steering column .............70  
Locking and unlocking ................30  
Contents  
1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
2
Storing steering column  
Fuel consumption gauge ................ 83  
Engine oil temperature gauge ....... 83  
Engine oil consumption ................. 83  
Exterior lamp switch ....................... 84  
Standing lamps ............................ 85  
Night security illumination ....... 85  
Combination switch ........................ 86  
Blocked windshield wiper .......... 88  
Windshield wiper smears .......... 88  
Windshield and  
Synchronizing  
position in memory .....................70  
Rear view mirrors ............................ 71  
Inside rear view mirror ............... 71  
Antiglare night position .............. 71  
Exterior rear view mirrors ..........72  
Storing mirror positions in  
memory ..........................................73  
Instrument cluster ........................... 74  
Indicator lamps in the  
power windows ............................117  
Roll bar .............................................118  
Interior lighting .............................120  
Interior lamps .............................120  
Reading lamps ............................120  
Entrance lamps in footwells,  
exit lamps in doors ....................120  
Sunshade, manual .........................121  
Power sunshade .............................122  
instrument cluster ....................... 76  
Additional function indicator  
Sun visors .......................................123  
headlamp washer fluid  
mixing ratio .................................. 88 Illuminated vanity mirror ............123  
lamps ..............................................77  
Instrument lamps .........................77  
Display illumination ....................77  
Coolant temperature gauge ........78  
Outside temperature  
indicator ........................................78  
Hazard warning flasher  
Interior ............................................124  
Storage compartment  
(eyeglasses compartment)  
in the dashboard .......................124  
Interior central  
locking system ............................125  
Integration with vehicle  
central locking system ..............126  
Separate locking of storage  
compartments .............................126  
Armrest ...........................................127  
Console storage compartments ...127  
switch ........................................... 89  
Automatic climate control .............. 90  
Display and controls ................... 92  
Basic setting -  
automatic mode ........................... 93  
Economy ........................................ 93  
Special settings ............................ 94  
Audio and telephone, operation .... 98  
Power windows ...............................116  
Express opening of  
Trip odometer ...............................79  
Clock ..............................................79  
Tachometer ....................................79  
Flexible service system (FSS) ........80  
Engine oil level indicator in odometer  
display field .................................82  
door windows ..............................117  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Cup holder ......................................128 The first 1 000 miles  
Drinking and driving ................. 176  
Pedals ........................................... 176  
Power assistance ........................177  
Brakes ..........................................177  
Driving off ...................................178  
Parking ........................................178  
Tires .............................................179  
Aquaplaning ...............................180  
Tire traction ................................180  
Tire speed rating ........................ 181  
Snow chains ................................ 181  
Vehicles with  
sport package .............................. 181  
Deep water ..................................182  
Winter driving  
instructions .................................182  
Winter driving ............................183  
Block heater ................................183  
Traveling abroad ........................183  
Cruise control .................................184  
Brake assist system  
(1 500 km) ..................................155  
Parcel net in  
passenger footwell ....................128 Maintenance ...................................155  
Door pockets ...................................129 Tele Aid ............................................156  
Rear storage compartment ...........129 Catalytic converter .........................163  
Ashtray with lighter ......................130 Emission control .............................164  
Lighter ............................................. 131 Steering lock ...................................165  
Telephone, general ........................132 Starting and turning off  
the engine ...................................167  
Before starting .............................167  
Garage door opener .......................133  
Hardtop or panorama roof ............137  
Removing hardtop ......................137  
Attaching hardtop ......................140  
Soft top ............................................143  
Lowering soft top ........................144  
Raising soft top ...........................145  
Wind screen ....................................148  
Antenna ........................................... 151  
Starting .........................................167  
Turning off ...................................167  
Automatic transmission ................168  
Driving .........................................168  
Accelerator Position ...................169  
Selector lever positions .............169  
Maneuvering .............................. 172  
Stopping ...................................... 172  
Program mode  
Driving  
selector switch ........................... 173  
Emergency Operation ................174  
Parking brake ................................ 175  
Driving instructions .......................176 Antilock brake system  
Drive sensibly - Save fuel ..........176  
Control and operation of radio  
transmitters ...............................154  
Radio and telephone ..................154  
Telephones and  
(BAS) ...........................................188  
(ABS) ........................................... 190  
two-way radio ..............................154  
Contents  
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
4
ABS control ................................. 191  
Electronic Stability Program  
Low engine coolant  
level warning lamp ....................209  
Low windshield and  
headlamp washer  
system fluid level  
warning lamp .............................. 210  
Low engine oil level  
warning lamp .............................. 210  
Charge indicator lamp ............... 211  
Exterior lamp failure  
indicator lamp ............................. 211  
Roll bar warning lamp ............... 212  
ADS indicator lamp .................... 212  
High beam  
indicator lamp ............................. 213  
Additional function  
indicator lamps  
(in the odometer display) .......... 213  
Instrument cluster display  
Malfunction and indicator  
lamps in the  
instrument cluster ....................204  
On-board  
diagnostic system ......................204  
Check engine malfunction  
indicator lamp ............................ 204  
Brake warning lamp ..................205  
Brake pad wear  
indicator lamp ............................ 205  
Seat belt warning lamp .............206  
Supplemental  
(ESP) ........................................... 192  
Synchronizing ESP ....................193  
ESP Control Switch ....................194  
Level control system ......................196  
Level control  
switch positions .......................... 196  
Normal Level ............................... 197  
Wheel Change Switch ...............198  
Adaptive Damping System  
(ADS) ........................................... 199  
Adaptive damping system  
adjustment ..................................199  
What you should know  
at the gas station .......................200  
Fuel supply ..................................200  
Fuel ...............................................200  
Check regularly and  
restraint system  
(SRS) indicator lamp ................. 206  
Fuel reserve and fuel cap  
placement warning ................... 207  
Electronic stability program  
(ESP)- warning lamp ................. 207  
BAS/ESP malfunction  
indicator lamp ............................ 207  
ABS malfunction  
indicator lamp ............................ 208  
Malfunction and  
indicator lamp  
(in the dashboard) .................... 213  
Passenger airbag  
indicator lamp ............................. 213  
before a long trip .......................202  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Jump starting ................................. 239  
Towing the vehicle ........................ 241  
Exterior lamps ............................... 243  
Headlamp assembly  
(Halogen) ....................................244  
Taillamp assemblies ..................250  
Changing batteries in the  
remote control ...........................252  
Synchronizing ............................ 253  
Raising soft top manually ............ 254  
Ornamental moldings ................264  
Headlamps, taillamps,  
Practical hints  
First aid kit ..................................... 216  
Stowing things in the vehicle ...... 216  
Vehicle tools .................................... 217  
Vehicle jack ..................................... 218  
Fuses ................................................ 219  
Hood .................................................220  
Automatic transmission  
fluid level ...................................222  
Checking engine oil level .............222  
Coolant level ...................................224  
Adding coolant ...............................225  
Windshield and  
turn signal lenses ......................264  
Window cleaning .......................265  
Light alloy wheels ......................265  
Instrument cluster .....................265  
Steering wheel and  
gear selector lever ......................265  
Cup holder ...................................265  
Seat belts .....................................266  
Replacing wiper blade ................. 258  
Manual release of  
fuel filler flap ............................ 260  
Trunk lamp .....................................260  
Headliner, shelf behind  
roll bars, and other hard  
plastic trim items .......................266  
Soft top .........................................266  
Headliner .....................................267  
Wind screen ................................267  
Automatic antenna .....................267  
Wiper blade .................................267  
Headlamp cleaning  
system ..........................................267  
Leather upholstery .....................268  
Plastic and rubber parts ............268  
Illuminated door sill panels .....268  
headlamp washer  
fluid mixing ratio ......................226  
Wheels .............................................227  
Tire replacement ............................227  
Rotating wheels ..............................228  
Spare wheel ....................................229  
Changing wheels ...........................231  
Tire inflation pressure ..................235  
Battery .............................................237  
Battery Recycling .......................238  
Vehicle care  
Cleaning and care  
of the vehicle .............................262  
Power washer .............................263  
Tar stains ....................................263  
Paintwork, Painted Body  
Components ................................263  
Engine cleaning .........................264  
Vehicle washing .........................264  
Contents  
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
6
Technical data  
Index  
Spare parts service ........................270 Index ............................................... 285  
Warranty coverage .........................270  
Identification labels .......................271  
Layout of poly-V-belt drive ............272  
Engine ..............................................273  
Rims - Tires .....................................274  
Weights ............................................276  
Main Dimensions ...........................276  
Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc. -  
capacities ...................................277  
Engine oils ......................................279  
Engine oil additives .......................279  
Air conditioner refrigerant ...........279  
Brake fluid ......................................279  
Premium unleaded gasoline ........280  
Fuel requirements .........................280  
Gasoline additives .........................281  
Coolants ...........................................281  
Consumer information ..................283  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Product information  
Kindly observe the following in your own best interest:  
We recommend using Mercedes-Benz original parts as well as conversion parts and accessories  
explicitly approved by us for your vehicle model.  
We have tested these parts to determine their reliability, safety and their special  
suitability for Mercedes-Benz vehicles.  
We are unable to make an assessment for other products and therefore cannot be held responsible  
for them, even if in individual cases an official approval or authorization by governmental or other  
agencies should exist. Use of such parts and accessories could adversely affect the safety, performance  
or reliability of your vehicle. Please do not use them.  
Mercedes-Benz original parts as well as conversion parts and accessories approved by us are available  
at your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center where you will receive comprehensive information, also on  
permissible technical modifications, and where proper installation will be performed.  
Introduction  
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Introduction  
8
Operator’s manual  
This Operator’s Manual contains a great deal of useful information. We urge you to read it carefully and familiarize  
yourself with the vehicle before driving.  
For your own safety and longer service life of the vehicle, we urge you to follow the instructions and warnings  
contained in this manual. Ignoring them could result in damage to the vehicle or personal injury to you or others.  
Vehicle damage caused by failure to follow instructions is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.  
Your vehicle may have some or all of the equipment described in this manual. Therefore, you may find explanations  
for optional equipment not installed in your vehicle. If you have any questions about the operation of any equipment,  
your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will be glad to demonstrate the proper procedures.  
Service and warranty information  
The Service and Warranty Information Booklet contains detailed information about the warranties covering your  
Mercedes-Benz, including:  
• New Car Limited Warranty,  
• Emission System Warranty,  
• Emission Performance Warranty,  
• California, Massachusetts, and Vermont Emission Control System Warranty  
(California, Massachusetts, and Vermont only),  
• State Warranty Enforcement Laws (Lemon Laws).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Important notice for California retail buyers of Mercedes-Benz automobiles  
Under California law you may be entitled to a replacement of your vehicle or a refund of the purchase price, if  
Mercedes-Benz USA,LLC or its authorized Mercedes-Benz Center fails to conform the vehicle to its express warranties  
after a reasonable number of repair attempts during the period of one year or 12 000 miles from original delivery of  
the vehicle. A reasonable number of repair attempts is presumed for a retail buyer (1) if the vehicle is out of service by  
reason of repair of substantial nonconformities for a cumulative total of more than 30 calendar days or (2) the same  
substantial non-conformity has been subject to repair four or more times and you have at least once directly  
notified us in writing of the need to repair the non-conformity and have given us an opportunity to perform the  
repair ourselves. Notifications should be sent to the nearest Mercedes-Benz Regional Office listed in the  
Service and Warranty Information Booklet.  
Maintenance  
The Service Booklet describes all the necessary maintenance work which should be performed at regular intervals.  
Always have the Service Booklet with you when you take the vehicle to your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for  
service. The service advisor will record each service in the booklet for you.  
Introduction  
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Introduction  
10  
Roadside assistance  
The Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance Program provides factory trained technical help in the event of a breakdown.  
Calls to the toll-free Roadside Assistance number:  
1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the USA)  
1-800-387-0100 (in Canada)  
will be answered by Mercedes-Benz Client Assistance Representatives 24 hours a day, 365 days a year.  
For additional information refer to the Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance Program brochure in your glove box.  
Change of address or ownership  
If you change your address, be sure to send in the “Change of Address Notice” found in the Service and Warranty  
Information Booklet, or simply call the Mercedes-Benz Client Assistance Center (in the USA) at  
1-800-FOR-MERCedes, or Customer Service (in Canada) at 1-800-387-0100. It is in your own interest that we can  
contact you should the need arise.  
If you sell your Mercedes, please leave all literature with the vehicle to make it available to the next operator.  
If you bought this vehicle used, be sure to send in the “Notice of Purchase of Used Car” found in the Service and  
Warranty Information Booklet, or call the Mercedes-Benz Client Assistance Center (in the USA) at  
1-800-FOR-MERCedes, or Customer Service (in Canada) at 1-800-387-0100.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Operating your vehicle outside the USA or Canada  
If you plan to operate your vehicle in foreign countries, please be aware that:  
• Service facilities or replacement parts may not be readily available,  
• unleaded gasoline for vehicles with catalytic converters may not be available; the use of leaded fuels will damage  
the catalysts,  
• gasoline may have a considerably lower octane rating, and improper fuel can cause engine damage.  
Certain Mercedes-Benz models are available for delivery in Europe under our European Delivery Program. For details,  
consult your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or write to:  
In the USA:  
In Canada:  
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC  
European Delivery Department  
One Mercedes Drive  
Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.  
European Delivery Department  
849 Eglinton Avenue East  
Toronto, Ontario M4G 2L5  
Montvale, NJ 07645-0350  
Introduction  
11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Introduction  
12  
We continuously strive to improve our product, and ask for your understanding that we reserve the right to make  
changes in design and equipment. Therefore, information, illustrations and descriptions in this Operator’s Manual  
might differ from your vehicle.  
Optional equipment is also described in this manual, including operating instructions wherever necessary. Since they  
are special-order items, the descriptions and illustrations herein may vary slightly from the actual equipment of your  
vehicle.  
If there are any equipment details that are not shown or described in this Operator’s Manual, your authorized  
Mercedes-Benz Center will be glad to inform you of correct care and operating procedures.  
The Operator’s Manual and Service Booklet are important documents and should be kept with the vehicle.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Where to find it  
The Operator’s Manual is divided into eight sections:  
Instruments and controls: An overview of all the controls that can be operated from the driver’s seat.  
Operation: Information on the vehicle’s equipment and its operation.  
Driving: Important information on driving.  
Instrument cluster display: Displays and indicator lamps on the instrument cluster with brief instructions.  
Practical hints: Assistance and instructions in the event of an emergency.  
Car care: Instructions on caring for your vehicle.  
Technical data: All the important technical data for your vehicle as well as consumer information such as fuels,  
coolants, lubricants etc. is contained here.  
Index: Key terms to help you find a topic quickly.  
Other documents may also be supplied, depending on your vehicle’s equipment.  
Explanation of color used:  
Warning notices for the protection of yourself and  
others appear on red background.  
Introduction  
13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Introduction  
14  
Problems with your vehicle  
If you should experience a problem with your vehicle, particularly one that you believe may affect  
its safe operation, we urge you to immediately contact your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center to  
have the problem diagnosed and corrected if required. If the matter is not handled to your  
satisfaction, please discuss the problem with the Mercedes-Benz Center management, or if  
necessary contact us at the following addresses:  
In the USA: Client Assistance Center  
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC  
One Mercedes Drive  
Montvale, NJ 07645-0350  
In Canada:  
Customer Relations Department  
Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.  
849 Eglinton Avenue East  
Toronto, Ontario, M4G 2L5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
For the USA only:  
The following text is published as required of manufacturers under Title 49, Code of U.S. Federal Regulations,  
Part 575 pursuant to the “National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act of 1966”.  
Reporting Safety Defects  
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or  
death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration  
(NHTSA) in addition to notifying Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC.  
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety  
defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA  
cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your retailer, or Mercedes-Benz USA,  
Inc.  
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-800-424-9393  
(or 366-0123 in Washington, D.C. area) or write to: NHTSA, U.S. Department of Transportation,  
Washington, D.C. 20590. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from  
the Hotline.  
Introduction  
15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments and controls  
Instruments and controls ............... 18  
Door control panel .......................20  
Overhead control panel ...............21  
Dashboard .....................................22  
Center console ..............................24  
Contents - Instruments and controls  
17  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Instruments and controls  
Instruments and controls  
18  
1
2
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1 Door control panel, see page 20  
3 Dashboard, see page 22  
2 Overhead control panel, see page 21  
4 Center console, see page 24  
Instruments and controls  
19  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Instruments and controls  
Door control panel  
20  
1 Door handle, pull to open, see page 34  
2 Front seat adjustment, see page 44  
Memory function (for storing seat, head restraint,  
steering wheel and exterior rear view mirror  
settings), see page 46  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Overhead control panel  
1 Hands-free microphone for Tele Aid, and optional  
telephone with voice recognition system  
2 Interior lighting, see page 120  
3 Tele Aid (emergency call system), see page 156  
4 Rear view mirror, see page 71  
5 Garage door opener, see page 133  
Instruments and controls  
21  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Instruments and controls  
Dashboard  
22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1 Side air outlet, adjustable, see page 91  
16 Non-heated/cooled air supply button - center air  
outlet, see page 91  
2 Level control switch and wheel change switch,  
see page 196  
17 Storage/eyeglasses compartment, see page 124  
18 Air volume control for left air outlet, see page 91  
19 Air volume control for center air outlets, see page 91  
20 Air volume control for right air outlet, see page 91  
21 Airbag off indicator lamp, see page 213  
3 Exterior lamp switch, see page 86  
4 Parking brake release, see page 175  
5 Hood lock release, see page 220  
6 Parking brake pedal, see page 175  
7 Combination switch, see page 86  
8 Cruise control switch, see page 184  
9 Horn  
22 Automatic climate control, see page 90  
Rear window defroster switch, see page 95  
23 Audio system, see page 98  
24 Trunk lid release switch, see page 39  
10 Airbag, see page 60  
25 Switch for tow-away alarm, see page 43  
Indicator lamp for antitheft alarm system,  
see page 42  
11 Voice recognition system switch, see separate  
operating instructions  
12 Instrument cluster, see page 74  
26 Central locking switch, see page 36  
13 Steering lock with ignition/starter switch,  
27 Hazard warning flasher switch, see page 89  
see page 165  
28 Adaptive damping system adjustment switch,  
14 Center air outlets adjustable, see page 91  
see page 199  
15 Heated air supply button - center air outlet,  
29 ESP control switch, see page 194  
see page 91  
30 Roll bar operation switch, see page 118  
Instruments and controls  
23  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Instruments and controls  
Center console  
24  
31 Ashtray with lighter (to open press bottom of cover),  
see page 130  
32 Mirror adjustment switch, see page 72  
33 Soft/hardtop operation switch, see page 143  
34 Seat heater switch, see page 50  
35 Power window switch, see page 116  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Instruments and controls  
25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Contents - Operation  
26  
Antitheft alarm system ................... 42  
Tow-away alarm ............................... 43  
Power seats ....................................... 44  
Storing position in memory ....... 46  
Backrest ............................................ 48  
Multicontour seats .......................... 49  
Seat heater ........................................ 50  
Seat belts and integrated  
restraint system .......................... 52  
Seat belts .......................................... 52  
Seat belt nonusage  
warning system ............................ 53  
Fastening of seat belts ................ 54  
BabySmartTM airbag  
Side impact airbags .....................62  
Safety guidelines for the  
seat belt, emergency tensioning  
retractor and airbag .....................67  
Infant and child  
restraint systems ..........................68  
Adjusting steering column .............70  
Storing steering column  
position in memory .....................70  
Rear view mirrors ............................ 71  
Inside rear view mirror ............... 71  
Antiglare night position .............. 71  
Exterior rear view mirrors ..........72  
Storing mirror positions in  
Operation  
Vehicle keys ......................................28  
Remote control with  
folding master key .......................28  
Central locking system ...................29  
Remote control .............................29  
Locking and unlocking ................30  
Choosing global or selective  
mode on remote control .............. 31  
Opening the trunk ....................... 31  
Panic button ..................................32  
Start lock-out ....................................33  
General notes on the  
central locking system ...............33  
Doors ..................................................34  
Central locking switch ....................36  
Automatic central locking ..........37  
Emergency unlocking in case of  
accident ........................................38  
Trunk .................................................38  
Trunk lid release switch .................39  
Trunk lid emergency release .........40  
Power windows ................................. 41  
memory ..........................................73  
Instrument cluster ........................... 74  
Flexible service system (FSS) ........80  
deactivation system ................... 58  
Self-test BabySmartTM  
without special child  
seat installed ............................... 58 Engine oil level indicator in odometer  
Supplemental restraint  
system (SRS) ............................... 59 Fuel consumption gauge ................83  
Emergency tensioning  
retractor (ETR) ............................ 59  
Airbags .............................................. 60  
Front airbags ................................ 62  
display field .................................82  
Engine oil temperature gauge ........83  
Engine oil consumption ..................83  
Exterior lamp switch .......................84  
Standing lamps .............................85  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Night security illumination ........85 Interior lighting ............................. 120 Cup holder ......................................128  
Combination switch ........................86  
Blocked windshield wiper ..........88  
Windshield wiper smears ...........88  
Windshield and  
headlamp washer fluid  
mixing ratio ..................................88  
Hazard warning flasher switch .....89  
Automatic climate control ..............90  
Display and controls ....................92  
Interior lamps ............................. 120 Parcel net in  
passenger footwell ....................128  
Reading lamps ............................ 120  
Door pockets ...................................129  
Entrance lamps in footwells,  
exit lamps in doors .................... 120 Rear storage compartment ...........129  
Sunshade, manual ..........................121 Ashtray with lighter ......................130  
Power sunshade ............................. 122 Lighter ............................................. 131  
Sun visors ....................................... 123 Telephone, general ........................132  
Illuminated vanity mirror ............ 123 Garage door opener .......................133  
Interior ............................................ 124 Hardtop or panorama roof ............137  
Basic setting -  
automatic mode ............................93  
Economy ........................................93  
Special settings ............................94  
Audio and telephone, operation ....98  
Power windows ................................116  
Express opening of  
door windows ...............................117  
Synchronizing  
Storage compartment  
Removing hardtop ......................137  
Attaching hardtop ......................140  
Soft top ............................................143  
Lowering soft top ........................144  
Raising soft top ...........................145  
Wind screen ....................................148  
Antenna ........................................... 151  
(eyeglasses compartment)  
in the dashboard ...................... 124  
Interior central  
locking system ........................... 125  
Integration with vehicle  
central locking system .............. 126  
Separate locking of storage  
compartments ............................ 126  
Armrest ........................................... 127  
Console storage compartments ... 127  
power windows ............................117  
Roll bar .............................................118  
Contents - Operation  
27  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Car care  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Central locking system  
Vehicle keys  
28  
Remote control with folding master key  
Included with your vehicle are 2 remote controls with  
folding master keys.  
Warning!  
When leaving the vehicle always remove the key  
from the steering lock, and lock your vehicle. Do  
not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or  
with access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised  
use of vehicle equipment may cause serious  
personal injury.  
1
The remote control operates all locks on the vehicle.  
To release the key, press button (1). The key unfolds  
from the holder by itself.  
The transmitter for the remote control is located in the  
key holder.  
The infrared receivers are located in the door handles.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Note:  
Do not give the master key to an unauthorized person.  
Obtaining replacement keys  
Your vehicle is equipped with a theft deterrent locking  
system requiring a special key manufacturing process.  
For security reasons, replacement keys can only be  
obtained from your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.  
Central locking system  
Remote control  
1 Transmit button  
Due to the extended operational range of the remote  
control, it could be possible to unintentionally lock or  
unlock the vehicle by pressing the transmit button.  
Locking  
Œ Unlocking  
The vehicle doors, trunk, storage compartment in  
armrest, and fuel filler flap can be centrally locked and  
unlocked via remote control.  
Š Opening trunk  
2 PANIC button  
3 Release button for master key  
4 Transmitter eye and lamp for battery check  
Central locking system  
29  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Central locking system  
30  
Locking and unlocking with remote control  
If within 40 seconds of unlocking with the remote  
control, neither door is opened, the key is not inserted  
in the steering lock, or the central locking switch is not  
activated, the vehicle will automatically lock.  
Unlocking:  
Press transmit button Œ. All turn signal lamps blink  
once to indicate that the vehicle is unlocked.  
Locking:  
The remote control can be programmed for two kinds of  
unlocking modes (see below):  
Press transmit button once. All turn signal lamps  
blink three times to indicate that the vehicle is locked.  
Selective unlocking mode –  
Note:  
Press transmit button Œ once to unlock driver’s door,  
storage compartment in armrest, and fuel filler flap.  
Press transmit button Œ twice to unlock both doors,  
storage compartment in armrest, fuel filler flap, and  
trunk.  
If the vehicle cannot be locked or unlocked by pressing  
the transmit button, then it may be necessary to change  
the batteries in the remote control (if ok, battery check  
lamp in transmitter will light briefly when transmitting)  
or to synchronize the remote control, see page 252 and  
page 253.  
Global unlocking mode –  
Press transmit button Œ once to unlock both doors,  
storage compartment in armrest, fuel filler flap, and  
trunk.  
Notes:  
If the trunk was previously locked separately, it will  
remain locked, see page 38.  
The presently active unlocking mode (selective or  
global) can only be determined by unlocking the vehicle  
with the remote control (see below for changing mode).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Choosing global or selective mode on remote control  
Opening the trunk  
Press and hold transmit buttons and Œ  
simultaneously for five seconds to reprogram the  
remote control. Battery check lamp will blink two times  
indicating the completed mode change.  
Press the transmit button Š until the trunk lid is  
open.  
Important!  
Do not place remote control in trunk since trunk is  
locked when the lid is closed if the vehicle is centrally  
locked.  
Note:  
If the trunk was previously locked separately, it will  
remain locked. See page 38.  
Central locking system  
31  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Central locking system  
Panic button  
32  
Note:  
For operation in the USA only: This device complies  
with Part 15, Subpart C, Section 209 of the FCC Rules.  
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:  
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and  
(2) this device must accept any interference received,  
including interference that may cause undesired  
operation.  
Warning: Changes or modification not expressly  
approved by party responsible for compliance could void  
the user’ s authority to operate the equipment.  
To activate press and hold button (1) for at least one  
second. An audible alarm and blinking exterior lamps  
will operate for approximately 3 minutes.  
To deactivate press button (1) again, or turn key in  
steering lock to position 2.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Start lock-out  
Important!  
General notes on the central locking system  
If the key in the steering lock is in position 2, the  
vehicle cannot be locked or unlocked with the remote  
control.  
Removing the key from the steering lock activates the  
start lock-out. The engine cannot be started.  
If the vehicle cannot be locked or unlocked:  
Turning the key in the steering lock to position 2  
deactivates the start lock-out.  
• Aim transmitter eye at a receiver of either door  
handle and press button or Œ.  
Note:  
• Check the batteries of the remote control,  
see page 252.  
In case the engine cannot be started (vehicle’s battery is  
in order), and Á and î are shown in the  
odometer display field, the system is not operational.  
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or call  
1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the USA), or 1-800-387-0100  
(in Canada).  
• Synchronize the remote control,  
see page 253.  
Central locking system  
33  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Central locking system  
Doors  
34  
1 Opening – pull handle  
The entire vehicle may be locked or unlocked by either  
using the master key in driver’s door or trunk locks, or  
central locking switch located in center console. The  
master key also locks or unlocks the storage  
2 Unlocking  
3 Locking  
compartment in the armrest, and the fuel filler flap.  
4 Individual door from inside:  
• Push lock button down to lock.  
• Pull inside door handle to unlock.  
Note:  
If the fuel filler flap cannot be opened, see page 260.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
When you lock the vehicle, both door lock buttons  
should move down. If any one stays up, the respective  
door is not properly closed.  
Notes:  
In case of a malfunction in the central locking system  
the doors can be locked and unlocked individually.  
You should then unlock the vehicle, open and reclose  
this door, and lock the vehicle again. Each individual  
door can be locked with door lock button – the driver’s  
door can only be locked when it is closed.  
To lock, turn key in driver’s door lock to position 3 or  
push down lock buttons.  
To unlock, turn key in driver’s door lock to position 2 or  
pull inside door handles.  
If the vehicle has previously been locked from the  
outside, only the door being opened from the inside will  
unlock, and the alarm will come on. The other door, the  
trunk, the interior storage compartments, and fuel filler  
flap remain locked.  
Central locking system  
35  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Central locking system  
Central locking switch  
36  
Notes:  
If the vehicle was previously locked with the remote  
control or key, the doors and trunk cannot be unlocked  
with the central locking switch.  
Opening a door with the inside door handle will cause  
the alarm to come on. To switch the alarm off,  
press Œ button or insert key in steering lock and  
turn it to position 1.  
1
If the vehicle was previously locked with the central  
locking switch, while in the selective remote control  
mode, only the door opened from the inside is unlocked.  
2
If the vehicle was previously locked with the central  
locking switch, while in the global remote control mode,  
the complete vehicle is unlocked when a door is opened  
from the inside.  
P54.25-0314-26  
1 Locking  
2 Unlocking  
Note:  
The central locking switch is located in the center  
console.  
The storage compartment in the armrest as well as the  
fuel filler flap cannot be locked or unlocked with the  
central locking switch.  
The doors and trunk can only be locked with the central  
locking switch, if both doors are closed.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Automatic central locking  
If a door is opened from the inside at speeds of approx.  
9 mph (15 km/h) or less with the automatic central  
locking activated, the door will again be automatically  
locked at speeds of approx. 9 mph (15 km/h) or more.  
The central locking switch also operates the automatic  
central locking.  
With the automatic central locking system activated, the  
doors and trunk are locked at vehicle speeds of approx.  
9 mph (15 km/h) or more. The fuel filler flap remains  
unlocked.  
Important!  
When towing the vehicle, or with the vehicle on a  
dynamometer test stand, please, note the following:  
With the automatic central locking activated and the  
key in steering lock position 2, the vehicle doors will  
lock if the left front wheel as well as the right rear  
wheel spin are turning at vehicle speeds of approx.  
9 mph (15 km/h) or more.  
To activate:  
With key in steering lock position 2 hold upper portion  
of switch (1) for a minimum of 5 seconds.  
To deactivate:  
To prevent the vehicle door locks from locking,  
deactivate the automatic central locking.  
With key in steering lock position 2 hold lower portion  
of switch (2) for a minimum of 5 seconds.  
Emergency unlocking in case of accident  
Notes:  
If doors are unlocked with the central locking switch  
after activating the automatic central locking, and  
neither door is opened, then the doors remain unlocked  
even at vehicle speeds of approx. 9 mph (15 km/h) or  
more.  
The doors unlock automatically a short time after a  
strong deceleration is detected, such as in a collision  
(this is intended to aid rescue and exit). Driving on  
rough roads may cause the vehicle to unlock. If  
necessary, the vehicle can be locked again with the  
interior central locking switch.  
Central locking system  
37  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Central locking system  
Trunk  
38  
When the trunk is separately locked, it remains locked  
when centrally unlocking the vehicle.  
To deny any unauthorized person access to the trunk,  
lock it separately with the mechanical key.  
Notes:  
In case of a malfunction in the central locking system  
the trunk can be locked and unlocked individually.  
To lock, turn key to position 2 or 3.  
To unlock and open the trunk lid, turn key to position 1,  
hold and push to open.  
If the fuel filler flap cannot be opened, see page 260.  
Important!  
0 Neutral position – push to open (arrow)  
1 Unlocking  
Do not place key inside trunk, since trunk is locked  
again when closing the lid.  
2 Locking (detent)  
Lower trunk lid using handle and close it with hands  
placed flat on edges of trunk.  
3 Separate locking of trunk – remove key in this  
position.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Trunk lid release switch  
Notes:  
With vehicle centrally locked, the trunk can also be  
released by using the remote control. Press Š button  
one second.  
The trunk lid cannot be released by the switch when  
previously locked separately with the key. To open,  
see page 38.  
The trunk lid cannot be opened with the trunk lid  
release switch when the vehicle was previously locked  
with the remote control. To unlock vehicle with the  
remote control, see page 29.  
1
1 Indicator lamp in switch located in center console  
To release the trunk lid, the vehicle must be at standstill  
and unlocked with the remote control. Press symbol  
side of switch until trunk lid is released.  
The indicator lamp (1) in the switch remains on with  
trunk lid released.  
Central locking system  
39  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Central locking system  
Trunk lid emergency release  
40  
Note:  
The emergency release button (1) only unlocks and  
opens the trunk while the vehicle is standing.  
Important!  
The emergency trunk lid release button (1) does not  
open the trunk lid, if:  
• the vehicle battery is discharged or disconnected,  
• the trunk lid was previously locked separately with  
the mechanical key, see page 38.  
1
Illumination of the emergency release button (1):  
The button will blink for 30 minutes after opening the  
trunk.  
The emergency release button (1) is located in the  
center of the inside trunck rear wall.  
The button will blink for 60 minutes after closing the  
trunk.  
Briefly press emergency release button (1).  
All doors, the fuel filler flap, and the trunk unlock; and  
the trunk lid opens.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Power windows  
When unlocking doors or trunk, turn key in door lock or  
trunk lock to position 1 and hold. The windows begin to  
open automatically after approximately 1 second.  
To interrupt the opening procedure, turn key to  
position 2.  
Warning!  
Never operate the windows if there is the  
possibility of anyone being harmed by the  
procedure.  
In case the procedure causes potential danger, the  
procedure can be immediately reversed by turning  
the key to the reversed operational direction within  
10 seconds:  
• for opening position (1),  
• for closing position (3).  
1 Opening  
2 Interrupting  
3 Closing  
Note:  
When locking doors or trunk, turn key in door lock or  
trunk lock to position 3 and hold. The windows begin to  
close automatically after approximately 1 second.  
If the opening/closing procedure is interrupted, it can  
only be continued by first turning the key to the  
interrupting position (2) and then again to the opening/  
closing position (1 or 3) and hold.  
To interrupt the closing procedure, turn key to  
position 2.  
Central locking system  
41  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Antitheft alarm system  
Antitheft alarm system  
42  
Operation:  
Once the alarm system has been armed, the exterior  
vehicle lamps will flash and an alarm will sound when  
someone:  
• opens a door,  
• opens the trunk,  
• opens the hood,  
• opens the storage compartment between the front  
seats,  
• attempts to raise the vehicle.  
The alarm will last approximately 3 minutes in form of  
flashing exterior lamps. At the same time an alarm will  
sound for 30 seconds. The alarm will stay on even if, for  
example, an opened door is immediately closed again. If  
the alarm stays on for more than 20 seconds, an  
emergency call is initiated automatically. See Tele Aid  
on page 156.  
1 Indicator lamp in switch located in center console  
The antitheft alarm is automatically armed or disarmed  
with the remote control or any of your vehicle’s keys by  
locking or unlocking the vehicle.  
The antitheft alarm is armed within approximately  
10 seconds after locking the vehicle.  
The antitheft alarm system is switched off automatically  
if the vehicle is unlocked with the electronic main key.  
A blinking lamp (1) indicates that the alarm is armed.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Tow-away alarm  
The alarm will last approximately 3 minutes in the form  
of flashing exterior lamps. At the same time an alarm  
will sound for 30 seconds. The alarm will stay on even if  
the vehicle is immediately lowered.  
The tow-away alarm system is switched off automatically  
if the vehicle is unlocked with the electronic main key.  
If the alarm stays on for more than 20 seconds, an  
emergency call is initiated automatically. See Tele Aid  
on page 156.  
To prevent triggering the tow-away alarm feature, switch  
off the tow-away alarm before towing the vehicle, or  
when parking on a surface subject to movement, such  
as a ferry or auto train.  
To do so, turn key in steering lock to position 1 or 0, or  
remove key from steering lock. Press tow-away alarm  
switch (1). The indicator lamp (2) illuminates briefly.  
The switch is located in the center console.  
1 Press to switch off  
Exit vehicle, and lock vehicle with key or remote  
control.  
2 Indicator lamp  
Once the alarm system has been armed, the exterior  
vehicle lamps will flash and an alarm will sound when  
someone attempts to raise the vehicle.  
The tow-away alarm remains switched off until the  
vehicle is locked again with key or remote control, at  
which time it is automatically reactivated.  
Tow-away protection  
43  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Seats  
44  
Power seats  
We recommend to adjust the power seat in the following  
order:  
1 Seat, up/down  
Press the switch (up/down direction) until  
comfortable seating position with still sufficient  
headroom is reached.  
2 Seat adjustment, fore/aft  
Press the switch (fore/aft direction) until a  
comfortable seating position is reached that still  
allows you to reach the accelerator/brake pedal  
safely.  
2
1
2
3
3 Seat cushion tilt  
Press the switch in the direction of the arrow until  
your legs are lightly supported.  
The switches are located in both doors.  
Turn key in steering lock to position 1 or 2 (with either  
door open, the power seats can also be operated with the  
key removed or in steering lock position 0).  
4 Backrest tilt  
Press the switch in the direction of the arrow until  
the backrest is in an almost upright position. Adjust  
the steering wheel until your arms are slightly  
angled when holding the steering wheel. For  
steering wheel adjustment see page 70.  
The position should be as far rearward as possible,  
consistent with ability to properly operate controls.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5 Head restraint  
Do not adjust the driver’s seat while driving.  
Adjusting the seat while driving could cause the  
driver to lose control of the vehicle.  
(with shoulder belt height adjustment)  
Adjust the head restraint so that the upper portion  
of the shoulder belt is located as close as possible to  
the middle of the shoulder. The head restraint can  
be tilted forward by hand.  
Never ride in a moving vehicle with the backrest  
reclined.  
Sitting in an excessively reclined position can be  
dangerous. You could slide under the seat belt in a  
collision. If you slide under it, the belt would apply  
force at the abdomen or neck. That could cause  
serious or even fatal injuries. The backrest and seat  
belt provide the best restraint when the wearer is  
in an upright position and the belt is properly  
positioned on the body.  
Note:  
To prevent the backrest from touching the soft top  
storage compartment cover when the seat is moved  
back, the backrest will automatically move to a more  
upright position.  
When reclining the backrest, the seat will automatically  
move forward to prevent the backrest from touching the  
soft top storage compartment cover.  
The rear storage area should never be occupied by  
passengers since the vehicle is a 2 seater.  
Furthermore, there is a risk of injury in the rear by  
adjusting the power assisted front seats.  
Warning!  
Never place hands under seat or near any moving  
parts while a seat is being adjusted.  
When leaving the vehicle always remove the key  
from the steering lock, and lock the vehicle.  
The power seats can also be operated with a door  
open. Do not leave children unattended in the  
vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle.  
Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause  
serious personal injury.  
Seats  
45  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Seats  
46  
Storing position in memory  
Using the same position button, the steering wheel  
position and exterior rear view mirror positions will  
also be stored together with the seat position. For  
adjusting steering wheel and mirrors see page 70.  
Recalling stored positions  
Press position button “1”, “2” or “3” and hold until seat/  
head restraint/steering wheel/exterior rear view mirror  
movement has stopped.  
Note:  
2
For safety reasons, the seat/head restraint/steering  
wheel/exterior rear view mirror movement stops after  
releasing the position button.  
1
2
3
6 Memory button  
7 Position buttons “1”, “2” and “3”  
After the seat and head restraint are positioned, push  
memory button (6), release, and within 3 seconds push  
position button “1”. Two additional sets of positions  
may be stored into memory using position buttons “2”  
and “3”.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Important!  
Warning!  
Prior to operating the vehicle, the driver should adjust  
the seat height for proper vision as well as fore/aft  
placement and backrest angle to insure adequate  
control, reach, operation, and comfort. The head  
restraint should also be adjusted for proper height.  
Adjust head restraint to support the back of the head  
approximately at ear level. See also airbag section for  
proper seat positioning on page 60.  
Children 12 years old and under must never ride in  
this vehicle, except in a Mercedes-Benz authorized  
BabySmartTM compatible child seat, which operates  
with the BabySmartTM system installed in the  
vehicle to deactivate the passenger side front  
airbag when it is properly installed.  
Otherwise they will be struck by the airbag when it  
inflates in a crash. If this happens, serious or fatal  
injury will result.  
In addition, also adjust the steering wheel to ensure  
adequate control, reach, operation and comfort.  
Infants and small children must be seated in an  
appropriate infant or child restraint system, which  
is properly secured with the vehicle’s seat belt,  
fully in accordance with the child seat  
Both the inside and outside rear view mirrors should be  
adjusted for adequate rearward vision.  
manufacturer’s instructions.  
Fasten seat belts. Infants and small children should be  
seated in a properly secured restraint system that  
complies with U.S. Federal Motor Vehicle Safety  
Standard 213 and Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety  
Standard 213.  
A child’s risk of serious or fatal injuries is  
significantly increased if the child restraints are  
not properly secured in the vehicle and the child is  
not properly secured in the child restraint.  
All seat, head restraint, rear view mirror, and steering  
wheel adjustments as well as fastening of seat belts  
should be done before the vehicle is put into motion.  
Seats  
47  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Warning  
Car care  
Index  
Seats  
48  
Backrest  
The seat belts provide protection only with the  
backrest locked in place and, therefore, it must be  
locked in place with the vehicle in motion. Do not  
drive the vehicle when the backrest is not locked in  
place.  
Note:  
If the backrest and seat belt warning lamp < does  
not go out, but is instead lit continuously, then a  
backrest is not engaged in its lock.  
Always provide sufficient room behind the backrest and  
fold the backrest all the way back until it can be heard  
locking in place.  
P91.10-0461-26  
Folding forward:  
The warning lamp goes out as soon as both backrests  
are locked in place.  
Lift lever and fold forwards.  
If both backrests are locked in place and the warning  
lamp does not go out, have the system checked at your  
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center immediately.  
Folding back:  
Fold backrest back until it audibly locks in place.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Multicontour seats (optional)  
Some models may be equipped with multicontour seats.  
These seats have movable seat cushions, and inflatable  
air cushions built into the backrest to provide additional  
lumbar and side support.  
The seat cushion movement and amount of backrest  
cushion height and curvature can be continuously  
varied with regulators (1, 2 and 3) after turning the key  
in steering lock to position 2.  
1
2
3
4
The side bolsters of the backrest can be adjusted with  
rocker switch (4):  
• press down forward end -  
increase side support,  
P91.25-0298-26  
• press down rearward end -  
decrease side support.  
Switch is located on side of seat.  
If the engine is turned off, the last cushion setting is  
retained in memory, and automatically adjusts the  
cushion to this setting when the engine is restarted.  
We recommend to adjust the multicontour seat in the  
following order:  
1 Seat cushion depth  
2 Backrest bottom  
3 Backrest center  
4 Side bolster adjustment  
Seats  
49  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Seats  
50  
Seat heater (SL 500 optional)  
Press switch to turn on seat heater:  
1 Normal seat heating mode. One indicator lamp in  
the switch lights up.  
2 Rapid seat heating mode. Both indicator lamps in  
the switch light up. After approximately 5 minutes  
in the rapid seat heating mode, the seat heater  
automatically switches to normal operation and only  
one indicator lamp will stay on.  
1
Turning off seat heater:  
2
If one indicator lamp is on, press upper half of switch.  
If both indicator lamps are one, press lower half of  
switch.  
P91.30-0270-26  
If left on, the seat heater automatically turns off after  
approximately 30 minutes of operation.  
The seat heater switches are located on the center  
console.  
The seat heaters can be switched on with the key in  
steering lock positions 1 or 2.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Note:  
When in operation, the seat heater consumes a large  
amount of electrical power. It is not advisable to use the  
seat heater longer than necessary.  
The seat heaters may automatically switch off if too  
many power consumers are switched on at the same  
time, or if the battery charge is low. When this occurs,  
the indicator lamp in the switch will blink (both  
indicator lamps blink during rapid seat heating mode).  
The seat heaters will switch on again automatically as  
soon as sufficient voltage is available.  
If the blinking of the indicator lamps is distracting to  
you, the seat heaters can be switched off.  
Seats  
51  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Warning!  
Car care  
Index  
Restraint systems  
52  
Seat belts and integrated restraint system  
Your vehicle is equipped with lap-shoulder seat belts,  
emergency tensioning retractors for the seat belts, as  
well as airbags and knee bolsters.  
The seat belts provide protection only with the  
backrest locked in place. If the seat belt warning  
lamp < does not go out, but is instead lit  
continuously, then a backrest is not engaged in its  
lock.  
Seat belts  
Never ride in a moving vehicle with the backrest  
reclined. Sitting in an excessively reclined position  
can be dangerous. You could slide under the seat  
belt in a collision. If you slide under it, the belt  
would apply force at the abdomen or neck. That  
could cause serious or even fatal injuries. The  
backrest and seat belt provide the best restraint  
when the wearer is in an upright position and the  
belt is properly positioned on the body.  
Important!  
Laws in most states and all Canadian provinces require  
seat belt use.  
All states and provinces require use of child restraints  
that comply with U.S. Federal Motor Vehicle Safety  
Standard 213 and Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety  
Standard 213.  
All child restraint systems are designed to be secured in  
vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion of a lap-  
shoulder belt.  
For your safety and that of your passenger we strongly  
recommend their use.  
Note:  
For cleaning and care of the seat belts, see page 266.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Seat belt nonusage warning system  
Warning!  
With the key in steering lock position 2, a warning  
sounds for a short time if the driver’s seat belt is not  
fastened.  
Children 12 years old and under must never ride in  
this vehicle, except in a Mercedes-Benz authorized  
BabySmartTM compatible child seat, which operates  
with the BabySmartTM system installed in the  
vehicle to deactivate the passenger side front  
airbag when it is properly installed. Otherwise they  
will be struck by the airbag when it inflates in a  
crash. If this happens, serious or fatal injury can  
result.  
Warning!  
Failure to wear and properly fasten and position  
your seat belt greatly increases your risk of  
injuries and their likely severity in an accident.  
You and your passenger should always wear seat  
belts.  
Infants and small children must be seated in an  
appropriate infant or child restraint system, which  
is properly secured with the vehicle’s seat belt,  
fully in accordance with the child seat  
If you are ever in an accident, your injuries can be  
considerably more severe without your seat belt  
properly buckled. Without your seat belt buckled,  
you are much more likely to hit the interior of the  
vehicle or be ejected from it. You can be seriously  
injured or killed.  
manufacturer’s instructions.  
A child’s risk of serious or fatal injuries is  
significantly increased if the child restraints are  
not properly secured in the vehicle and the child is  
not properly secured in the child restraint.  
In the same crash, the possibility of injury or death  
is lessened if you are wearing your seat belt.  
Never let more people ride in the vehicle than there  
are seat belts available. Be sure everyone riding in  
the vehicle is correctly restrained with a separate  
seat belt.  
BabySmartTM is a trademark of Siemens Automotive Corp.  
Restraint systems  
53  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Restraint systems  
54  
Fastening of seat belts  
1 Latch plate  
2 Buckle  
3 Release button  
Pull belt with latch plate (1) across shoulder and lap.  
Push latch plate (1) into buckle (2) until it clicks.  
To help avoid severe or fatal injuries, the lap belt should  
be positioned as low as possible on your hips and not  
across the abdomen.  
Warning!  
Always fasten your seat belt before driving off.  
Always make sure your passenger is properly  
restrained.  
Do not twist the belt. A twisted seat belt may cause  
injury.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Operation of seat belts  
The inertia reel stops the belt from unwinding during  
sudden vehicle stops or when quickly pulling on the  
belt.  
4
The locking function of the reel may be checked by  
quickly pulling out the belt.  
1
2
3
P91.40-0346-26  
Press switch (4) to adjust the height of the seat belt  
outlet so that the shoulder portion is located as close as  
possible to the middle of your shoulder.  
The shoulder portion of the seat belt must be pulled  
snug and checked for snugness immediately after  
engaging it and during driving. Tighten the lap portion  
to a snug fit by pulling shoulder portion up.  
Restraint systems  
55  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Warning!  
Car care  
Index  
Restraint systems  
56  
Caution!  
For safety reasons, avoid adjusting the seat or backrest  
into positions which could affect the correct seat belt  
positioning.  
USE SEAT BELTS PROPERLY.  
• Each occupant should wear their seat belt at all  
times, because seat belts help reduce the  
likelihood of and potential severity of injuries  
in accidents, including rollovers. The  
Unfastening of seat belts  
integrated restraint system includes “SRS”  
(driver airbag, passenger airbag, door mounted  
side impact airbags), “ETR” (seat belt  
emergency tensioning retractors), and front  
seat knee bolsters. The system is designed to  
enhance the protection offered to properly  
belted occupants in certain frontal (front  
airbags) and side (side impact airbags) impacts  
which exceed preset deployment thresholds.  
Push the release button (3) in the belt buckle (2).  
Allow the retractor to completely rewind the seat belt by  
guiding the latch plate (1).  
• Never wear belts over rigid or breakable  
objects in or on your clothing, such as  
eyeglasses, pens, keys etc., as these might  
cause injuries.  
• Position the lap belt as low as possible on your  
hips and not across the abdomen. If the belt is  
positioned across your abdomen, it can cause  
serious injuries in a crash.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
• Never wear the shoulder belt under your arm,  
against you neck or off your shoulder. In a  
crash, your body would move too far forward.  
That would increase the chance of head and  
neck injuries. The belt would also apply too  
much force to the ribs or abdomen, which  
could severely injure internal organs such as  
your liver or spleen.  
Warning!  
USE CHILD RESTRAINTS PROPERLY.  
Children 12 years old and under must never ride in  
this vehicle, except in a Mercedes-Benz authorized  
BabySmartTM compatible child seat, which operates  
with the BabySmartTM system installed in the  
vehicle to deactivate the passenger side front  
airbag when it is properly installed. Otherwise they  
will be struck by the airbag when it inflates in a  
crash. If this happens, serious or fatal injury will  
result.  
• Each seat belt must never be used for more  
than one person at a time. Do not fasten a seat  
belt around a person and another person or  
other objects.  
Infants and small children must be seated in an  
appropriate infant or child restraint system, which  
is properly secured with the vehicle’s seat belt,  
fully in accordance with the child seat  
• Belts should not be worn twisted. In a crash,  
you wouldn’t have the full width of the belt to  
manage impact forces. The twisted belt against  
your body could cause injuries.  
manufacturer’s instructions.  
A child’s risk of serious or fatal injuries is  
significantly increased if the child restraints are  
not properly secured in the vehicle and the child is  
not properly secured in the child restraint.  
• Pregnant women should also use a lap-  
shoulder belt. The lap belt portion should be  
positioned as low as possible on the hips to  
avoid pressure on the abdomen.  
Adjust the passenger seat as far as possible  
rearward from the dashboard when the seat is  
occupied.  
• Never place your feet on the instrument panel  
or on the seat. Always keep both feet on the  
floor in front of the seat.  
Restraint systems  
57  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Restraint systems  
58  
BabySmartTM airbag deactivation system  
Please be sure to check the indicator every time  
you use the special system child seat.  
Special BabySmartTM compatible child seats, designed  
for use with the Mercedes-Benz system and available at  
any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center are required for  
use with the BabySmartTM airbag deactivation system.  
Should the light go out while the restraint is  
installed, please check installation. If the light  
remains out, do not use the BabySmartTM restraint  
to transport children on the front passenger seat  
until the system has been repaired.  
With the special child seat properly installed, the  
passenger side front airbag will not deploy. The 7  
indicator lamp located in the dashboard will be  
illuminated, except with key removed or in steering lock  
position 0. The system does not deactivate the door  
mounted side impact airbag.  
Self-test BabySmartTM  
without special child seat installed  
After turning key in steering lock to position 1 or 2, the  
7 indicator lamp located in the dashboard comes on  
for approx. 6 seconds and then extinguishes.  
Warning!  
The BabySmartTM airbag deactivation system will  
ONLY work with a special child seat designed to  
operate with it. It will not work with child seats  
which are not BabySmartTM compatible.  
If the indicator lamp should not come on or is  
continuously lit, the system is not functioning. You must  
see an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center before seating  
any child on the front passenger seat.  
Never place anything between seat cushion and  
child seat (e.g. pillow), since it reduces the  
effectiveness of the deactivation system.  
Follow the manufacturer’s instructions for  
installation of special child seats.  
The passenger front airbag will not deploy only if  
the 7 indicator lamp remains illuminated.  
BabySmartTM is a trademark of Siemens Automotive Corp.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Supplemental restraint system (SRS)  
Emergency tensioning retractor (ETR)  
Airbags are intended as a supplement to seat belts.  
Airbags alone cannot protect as well as airbags plus  
seat belts in impacts for which the airbags were  
designed to operate, and do not afford any protection  
whatsoever in crashes for which the airbags are not  
designed to deploy.  
The seat belts are equipped with emergency tensioning  
retractors. These tensioning retractors are located in  
each belt’s inertia reel and become operationally ready  
with the key in steering lock position 1 or 2.  
The emergency tensioning retractors are designed to  
activate only when the seat belts are fastened during  
frontal and front-angled impacts and rear impacts  
exceeding the first threshold of the SRS and in rear  
impacts exceeding a preset severity level. They remove  
slack from the belts in such a way that the seat belts fit  
more snugly against the body restricting its forward  
movement as much as possible.  
The SRS uses two crash severity levels (thresholds) to  
activate either the emergency tensioning retractor (ETR)  
or front airbag or both. Activation depends on the  
direction and severity of the impact exceeding the  
preset thresholds and whether the seat belt is fastened.  
Seat belt fastened  
In cases of other frontal impacts, rollovers, certain side  
impacts, rear collisions or other accidents without  
sufficient frontal or rear impact forces, the emergency  
tensioning retractors will not be activated. The driver  
and passenger will then be protected by the fastened  
seat belts and inertia reel in the usual manner.  
• first threshold exceeded:  
ETR activates  
• second threshold exceeded:  
airbag also activates  
Seat belt not fastened  
For seat belt and emergency tensioning retractor safety  
guidelines see page 67.  
• first threshold exceeded:  
airbag activates, but not ETR  
Driver and passenger systems operate independently of  
each other.  
Restraint systems  
59  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Restraint systems  
60  
Airbags  
1 Driver airbag  
2 Passenger front airbag  
3 Side impact airbags  
The most effective occupant restraint system yet  
developed for use in production vehicles is the seat belt.  
In some cases, however, the protective effect of a seat  
belt can be further enhanced by an airbag.  
In conjunction with wearing the seat belts, the driver  
and passenger airbags can provide increased protection  
for the driver and passenger in certain frontal impacts  
exceeding preset thresholds. Door mounted side impact  
airbags can provide increased protection to belted  
occupants on the impacted side of the vehicle in side  
impacts exceeding its preset thresholds.  
The operational readiness of the airbag system is  
verified by the indicator lamp "SRS" in the instrument  
cluster when turning the key in steering lock to  
position 2. If no fault is detected, the lamp will go out  
after approximately 4 seconds: after the lamp goes out,  
the system continues to monitor the components and  
circuitry of the airbag system and will indicate a  
malfunction by coming on again. If the lamp does not  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
come on at all or if it fails to extinguish after  
approximately 4 seconds or if it comes on thereafter, a  
malfunction in the system has been detected.  
Have the system checked at your authorized  
Mercedes-Benz Center immediately.  
Warning!  
The following system components are monitored or  
undergo a selfcheck: crash-sensor(s), airbag ignition  
circuits, seat belt buckles, emergency tensioning  
retractors, seat sensor.  
In the event a malfunction of the “SRS” is indicated  
as outlined above, the “SRS” may not be  
operational. For your safety, we strongly  
recommend that you visit an authorized  
Mercedes-Benz Center immediately to have the  
system checked; otherwise the “SRS” may not be  
activated when needed in an accident, which could  
result in serious or fatal injury, or it might deploy  
unexpectedly and unnecessary which could also  
result in injury.  
Initially, when the key is turned from steering lock  
position 0 to positions 1 or 2, malfunctions in the crash-  
sensor are detected and indicated (the “SRS” indicator  
lamp stays on longer than 4 seconds or does not come  
on). In the operational mode, after the indicator lamp  
has gone out following the initial check, interruptions or  
short circuits in the airbag ignition circuit and in the  
driver and passenger seat belt buckle harnesses, and  
low voltage in the entire system are detected and  
indicated.  
Restraint systems  
61  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Restraint systems  
62  
Front airbags  
Side impact airbags  
The driver and passenger front airbags are designed to  
activate only in certain frontal impacts exceeding a  
preset threshold.  
The side impact airbags are designed to activate only in  
certain side impacts exceeding a preset threshold. Only  
the side impact airbag on the impacted side of the  
vehicle deploy.  
The passenger front airbag deploys only if the front  
passenger seat is occupied, and the 7 indicator lamp  
in the dashboard is not illuminated.  
The passenger side impact airbag deploys only if the  
passenger seat is occupied.  
Note:  
Side impact airbags operate best in conjunction with a  
properly positioned and fastened seat belt.  
Heavy objects on the passenger seat can appear to the  
“SRS” to indicate the presence of an occupant in that  
seat which causes the passenger front airbag to deploy  
in a crash exceeding the appropriate threshold.  
Note:  
Heavy objects on passenger seat can cause the  
passenger door side impact airbag to deploy in a crash.  
Important!  
Airbags are designed to activate only in certain  
frontal (front airbags) impacts, or side (side impact  
airbags) impacts which exceed preset thresholds.  
Only during these types of impacts, if of sufficient  
severity to meet the deployment thresholds, will  
they provide their supplemental protection.  
The driver and passenger must always wear their  
seat belts, otherwise it is not possible for the airbags  
to provide their intended supplemental protection.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
In cases of other frontal impacts, angled impacts,  
roll-overs, other side impacts, rear collisions, or  
other accidents in which the airbags are not  
designed to deploy, the airbags will not be activated.  
The driver and passenger will then be protected by  
the fastened seat belts.  
Warning!  
Airbags are designed to reduce the potential of  
injury in certain frontal (front airbags) impacts,  
and side (side impact airbags) impacts which may  
cause significant injuries, however, no system  
available today can totally eliminate injuries and  
fatalities.  
We caution you not to rely on the presence of the  
airbags in order to avoid wearing your seat belt.  
The activation of the “SRS” temporarily releases a  
small amount of dust from the airbags. This dust,  
however, is neither injurious to your health, nor  
does it indicate a fire in the vehicle. The dust might  
cause some temporary breathing difficulty for  
people with asthma or other breathing trouble. To  
avoid this, you may wish to get out of the vehicle as  
soon as it is safe to do so. If you have any breathing  
difficulty but cannot get out of the vehicle after the  
airbag inflates, then get fresh air by opening a  
window or door.  
Your vehicle was originally equipped with airbags  
which are designed to activate in certain impacts  
exceeding a preset threshold to reduce the potential  
and severity of injury. It is important to your safety  
and that of your passenger that you replace deployed  
airbags and repair any malfunctioning airbags to  
ensure the vehicle will continue to provide crash  
protections for occupants.  
The service life of the airbags extends to the date  
indicated on the label located on the driverside  
door latch post. To provide continued reliability  
after that date, they should be inspected by an  
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center at that time and  
replaced when necessary.  
Restraint systems  
63  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Restraint systems  
64  
To reduce the risk of injury when the front airbags  
inflate, it is very important for the driver and front  
passenger to always be in a properly seated  
position and to wear their seat belts.  
• Adjust the driver’s seat as far as possible  
rearward, still permitting proper operation of  
vehicle controls. Adjust the driver’s seat as far  
as possible rearward, still permitting proper  
operation of vehicle controls. The distance  
from the center of the driver’s breastbone to  
the center of the airbag cover on the steering  
wheel must be at least ten inches (25 cm) or  
more. You should be able to accomplish this by  
a combination of adjustments to the seat and  
steering wheel. If you have any problems,  
please see your authorized Mercedes-Benz  
Center.  
For maximum protection in the event of a collision  
always be in normal seated position with your back  
against the backrest. Fasten your seat belt and  
ensure that it is properly positioned on your body.  
For unobstructive inflation of door side impact  
airbags, keep door pocket lids closed.  
Since the airbag inflates with considerable speed  
and force, a proper seating and hands on steering  
wheel position will help to keep you at a safe  
distance from the airbag.  
• Do not lean with your head or chest close to the  
steering wheel or dashboard.  
Occupants who are unbelted, out of position or too  
close to the airbag can be seriously injured by an  
airbag as it inflates with great force in the blink of  
an eye:  
• Keep hands on the outside of steering wheel  
rim. Placing hands and arms inside the rim  
can increase the risk and potential severity of  
hand/arm injury when the driver front airbag  
inflates.  
• Sit properly belted in an upright position with  
your back against the backrest.  
• Do not lean against doors.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
• Occupants, especially children, should never  
lean their heads in the area of the door where  
the side airbag inflates. This could result in  
serious injuries or death should the airbag be  
triggered. Always sit upright, use the seatbelts,  
and appropriate size infant or child restraint  
system.  
• Children 12 years old and under must never  
ride in this vehicle, except in a Mercedes-Benz  
authorized BabySmartTM compatible child seat,  
which operates with the BabySmartTM system  
installed in the vehicle to deactivate the  
passenger front airbag when it is properly  
installed. Otherwise they will be struck by the  
airbag when it inflates in a crash. If this  
happens, serious or fatal injury can result.  
• Adjust the passenger seat as far as possible  
rearward from the dashboard when the seat is  
occupied.  
Failure to follow these instructions can result in  
severe or fatal injuries to you or other occupants.  
Restraint systems  
65  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Restraint systems  
66  
Warning!  
To help avoid the possibility of injury, please follow  
these guidelines: (1) occupants, especially  
children, should never place their bodies or lean  
their heads in the area of the door where the side  
airbag inflates. This could result in serious  
injuries or death should the side airbag be  
activated; (2) always sit upright, properly use the  
seat belts and use an appropriately sized infant or  
child restraint system for all children 12 years old  
or under; and (3) always wear seat belts properly.  
Should you choose to place a child 12 years old or  
under in the front passenger seat of your vehicle,  
you must properly use a BabySmartTM child  
restraint. A BabySmartTM child restraint will turn  
off the passenger side front airbag. BabySmartTM  
will not, however, turn off the side impact airbag.  
It should be noted that there is a possibility for a  
side airbag related injury if occupants, especially  
children, are not properly seated or restrained  
when next to a side airbag which needs to deploy  
rapidly in a side impact in order to do its job.  
If you believe that, even with the use of these  
guidelines, it would be safer for your front  
passenger seat occupant to have the passenger side  
door mounted side airbag deactivated, then  
deactivation can be accomplished upon your  
written election to do so at your authorized  
Mercedes-Benz Center at an additional cost. Please  
contact your local authorized Mercedes-Benz  
Center or call our Client Assistance Center at  
1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) for details.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Safety guidelines for the seat belt, emergency  
tensioning retractor and airbag  
• No modifications of any kind may be made to  
any components or wiring of the “SRS”. This  
includes changing or removing any component  
or part of the “SRS”, the installation of  
Warning!  
additional trim material, badges etc. over the  
steering wheel hub, passenger airbag cover, or  
door trim panels, and installation of additional  
electrical/electronic equipment on or near  
“SRS” components and wiring. Keep area  
between airbags and occupants free of objects  
(e.g. packages, purses, umbrellas, etc.).  
• Damaged seat belts or belts that were highly  
stressed in an accident must be replaced and  
their anchoring points must also be checked.  
Use only belts installed or supplied by an  
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.  
• Do not pass belts over sharp edges.  
• Do not make any modification that could  
change the effectiveness of the belts.  
• An airbag system component within the  
steering wheel gets hot after the airbag has  
inflated. Do not touch.  
• Airbags and ETR’s are designed to function on  
a one-time-only basis. An airbag or emergency  
tensioning retractor (ETR) that was activated  
must be replaced.  
• Improper work on the system, including  
incorrect installation and removal, can lead to  
possible injury through an unintended  
activation of the “SRS”.  
• In addition, through improper work there is  
the risk of rendering the “SRS” inoperative or  
causing unintended airbag deployment. Work  
on the “SRS” must therefore only be performed  
by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.  
Restraint systems  
67  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Restraint systems  
68  
Infant and child restraint systems  
Use only a BabySmartTM compatible child restraint in  
this vehicle.  
• For your protection and the protection of  
others, when scrapping the airbag unit or  
emergency tensioning retractor, our safety  
instructions must be followed. These  
instructions are available at your authorized  
Mercedes-Benz Center.  
We recommend that all infants and children be properly  
restrained at all times while the vehicle is in motion.  
The passenger lap-shoulder belt has a special seat belt  
retractor for secure fastening of a child restraint.  
• Given the considerable deployment speed and  
the textile structure of the airbags, there is the  
possibility abrasions or other injuries  
To fasten a child restraint follow child restraint  
instructions for routing. Then pull shoulder belt out  
completely. Slide switch located on side of passenger  
seat to position N. Let the belt retract. During the  
seat belt retraction a ratcheting sound can be heard to  
indicate that the special seat belt retractor is activated.  
The belt is now locked. Push down on child restraint to  
take up any slack.  
resulting from airbag deployment.  
When you sell the vehicle we strongly urge you to give  
notice to the subsequent owner that it is equipped with  
an “SRS” by alerting him to the applicable section in the  
Operator’s Manual.  
To deactivate, release seat belt buckle and let seat belt  
retract completely. The seat belt can again be used in  
the usual manner.  
Warning!  
Never release the seat belt buckle while vehicle is  
in motion, since the special seat belt retractor will  
be deactivated.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Important!  
Warning!  
The use of infant or child restraints is required by law in  
all 50 states and all Canadian provinces.  
Children 12 years old and under must never ride in  
this vehicle, except in a Mercedes-Benz authorized  
BabySmartTM compatible child seat, which operates  
with the BabySmartTM system installed in the  
vehicle to deactivate the passenger front airbag  
when it is properly installed. Otherwise they will  
be struck by the airbag when it inflates in a crash.  
If this happens, serious or fatal injury can result.  
Infants and small children should be seated in an  
appropriate infant or child restraint system properly  
secured by a lap-shoulder belt, and that complies with  
U.S. Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213 and  
Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213.  
A statement by the child restraint manufacturer of  
compliance with this standard can be found on the  
instruction label on the restraint and in the instruction  
manual provided with the restraint.  
Infants and small children must be seated in an  
appropriate infant or child restraint system, which  
is properly secured with the vehicle’s seat belt,  
fully in accordance with the child seat  
manufacturer’s instructions.  
When using any infant or child restraint system, be sure  
to carefully read and follow all manufacturer’s  
instructions for installation and use.  
Infants and small children should never share a  
seat belt with another occupant. During an  
accident, they could be crushed between the  
occupant and seat belt.  
Please read and observe warning labels affixed to inside  
of vehicle and to infant or child restraints.  
When the child restraint is not in use, remove it  
from the vehicle or secure it with the seat belt to  
prevent the child restraint from becoming a  
projectile in the event of an accident.  
U.S.A. Models only:  
Since 1986 all U.S. child restraints comply with  
U.S. regulations without the use of a tether strap.  
Restraint systems  
69  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Adjusting steering column  
Adjusting steering column  
70  
Storing steering column position in memory  
The steering column position is stored in memory  
together with the seat/head restraint/exterior rear view  
mirror position and can be recalled when necessary,  
see memory recalling on page 46.  
Warning!  
Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving.  
Adjusting the steering wheel while driving, or  
driving without the telescoping adjustment locked  
could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle.  
Turn key in steering lock to position 1 or 2 (with either  
door open, the steering column can be operated with the  
key removed or in steering lock position 0).  
To extend or retract:  
Move switch (1) in desired direction.  
To raise or lower:  
Move switch (1) in desired direction.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Rear view mirrors  
Note:  
The automatic antiglare function does not react, if  
incoming light is not aimed directly at sensors in the  
mirror.  
Inside rear view mirror  
Manually adjust the mirror.  
Use your inside mirror to determine the size and  
distance of objects seen in the passenger side convex  
mirror.  
Warning!  
In the case of an accident liquid electrolyte may  
escape the mirror housing when the mirror glass  
breaks.  
Antiglare night position  
Electrolyte has an irritating effect. Do not allow the  
liquid come into contact with eyes, skin, clothing,  
or respiratory system. In cases it does, immediately  
flush affected area with water, and seek medical  
help if necessary.  
With the key in steering lock position 2, the mirror  
reflection brightness responds to changes in light  
sensitivity.  
With gear selector lever in position “R”, or with the  
interior lamp switched on, the mirror brightness does  
not respond to changes in light sensitivity.  
Rear view mirrors  
71  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Rear view mirrors  
Exterior rear view mirrors  
72  
With the key in steering lock position 2, the driver’s  
side mirror reflection brightness responds to changes in  
light sensitivity.  
With gear selector lever in position “R”, or with the  
interior lamp switched on, the driver’s side mirror  
brightness does not respond to changes in light  
sensitivity.  
2
1
Warning!  
Exercise care when using the passenger-side  
mirror. The passenger-side exterior mirror is  
convex (outwardly curved surface for a wider field  
of view). Objects in mirror are closer than they  
appear. Check your inside rear view mirror or  
glance over your shoulder before changing lanes.  
P82.00-0359-26  
The switch is located on the center console.  
Turn key in steering lock to position 2.  
Notes:  
The exterior mirrors have electrically heated glass. The  
heater switches on automatically, depending on outside  
temperature.  
First select the mirror to be adjusted - turn switch:  
1 Left mirror  
If the mirror housing is forcibly pivoted from its normal  
position, it must be repositioned by applying firm  
pressure until it snaps into place.  
2 Right mirror  
To adjust, toggle the switch forward, backward or to  
either side.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Storing mirror positions in memory  
Warning!  
The exterior rear view mirror positions are stored in  
memory with the seat/head restraint/steering column  
position and can be recalled when necessary,  
see memory recalling on page 46.  
In the case of an accident liquid electrolyte may  
escape the mirror housing when the mirror glass  
breaks.  
Electrolyte has an irritating effect. Do not allow the  
liquid come into contact with eyes, skin, clothing,  
or respiratory system. In cases it does, immediately  
flush affected area with water, and seek medical  
help if necessary.  
Important!  
Electrolyte drops coming into contact with the vehicle  
paint finish can only be completely removed while in  
their liquid state, by applying plenty of water.  
Rear view mirrors  
73  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Instrument cluster  
Instrument cluster  
74  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1 Fuel gauge with reserve and fuel cap placement  
8 EPS warning lamp (yellow), see page 207  
warning lamp (yellow), see page 207  
9 Odometer display field, see page 82  
2 Coolant temperature gauge, see page 78  
3 Fuel consumption gauge, see page 83  
4 Engine oil temperature gauge, see page 83  
10 Main/trip odometer, see page 79  
or FSS indicator, see page 80  
or engine oil level indicator, see page 82  
11 Outside temperature indicator, see page 78  
5 Left turn signal indicator lamp (green),  
see combination switch on page 86  
12 Right turn signal indicator lamp (green),  
see combination switch on page 86  
6 Knob for intensity of instrument lamps, see page 77,  
for resetting trip odometer, see page 79 and  
for calling up FSS indicator, see page 80  
13 Tachometer, see page 79  
14 Knob for setting clock, see page 79  
15 Clock, see page 79  
7 Speedometer  
Instrument cluster  
75  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Instrument cluster  
76  
Indicator lamps in the instrument cluster  
BAS/ESP malfunction, see page 207  
ABS malfunction, see page 208  
Fuel reserve and fuel cap placement  
warning, see page 207  
ABS  
High beam, see page 86  
Brake pads worn down, see page 205  
Battery not being charged properly,  
see page 211  
Brake fluid low (except Canada)  
Parking brake engaged, see page 205  
Low windshield and headlamp washer  
system fluid level see page 210  
Brake fluid low (Canada only)  
Parking brake engaged, see page 205  
Coolant level low, see page 209  
SRS malfunction, see page 206  
Engine oil level low, see page 210  
Fasten seat belt, see page 206  
Exterior lamp failure indicator lamp,  
see page 211  
If the lamp comes on when the engine is  
running, it indicates a malfunction of the  
fuel management system or the emission  
control system, or the fuel cap is not closed  
tight. In all cases, we recommend that you  
have the malfunction checked as soon as  
possible, see page 204.  
Roll bar warning lamp, see page 212  
ESP warning lamp. Adjust driving to road  
condition, see page 207  
ADS indicator lamp, see page 212  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Additional function indicator lamps  
(in the odometer display)  
Instrument lamps  
FSS indicator (distance, Service A),  
see page 80.  
FSS indicator (distance, Service B),  
see page 80.  
FSS indicator (days, Service A),  
see page 80.  
FSS indicator (days, Service B),  
see page 80.  
Start lock-out malfunction, see page 33.  
1 Adjusting knob  
Rotate adjusting knob (1) to vary intensity of instrument  
lamps.  
Display illumination  
Press adjusting knob (1) to briefly illuminate the display  
(with key removed or in steering lock position 0 or 1).  
Instrument cluster  
77  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Instrument cluster  
Coolant temperature gauge  
78  
Outside temperature indicator  
During severe operating conditions and stop-and-go city  
traffic, the coolant temperature may rise close to the red  
marking.  
The temperature sensor is located in the front bumper  
area. Due to its location, the sensor can be affected by  
road or engine heat during idling or slow driving. This  
means that the accuracy of the displayed temperature  
can only be verified by comparison to a thermometer  
placed next to the sensor, not by comparison to external  
displays (e.g. bank signs etc.).  
The engine should not be operated with the coolant  
temperature in the red zone. Doing so may cause  
serious engine damage which is not covered by the  
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.  
Adaptation to ambient temperature takes place in steps  
and depends on the prevailing driving conditions (stop-  
and-go or moderate, constant driving) and amount of  
temperature change.  
Warning!  
• Driving when your engine is badly overheated  
can cause some fluids which may have leaked  
into the engine compartment to catch fire. You  
could be seriously burned.  
Warning!  
The outside temperature indicator is not designed  
to serve as an Ice-Warning Device and is therefore  
unsuitable for that purpose. Indicated  
temperatures just above the freezing point do not  
guarantee that the road surface is free of ice.  
• Steam from an overheated engine can cause  
serious burns and can occur just by opening  
the engine hood. Stay away from the engine if  
you see or hear steam coming from it.  
Turn off the engine, get out of the vehicle and do  
not stand near the vehicle until it cools down.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Trip odometer  
Clock  
Adjusting clock one minute ahead or back:  
Pull out adjustment knob (2), briefly turn to the right  
respectively left and release knob.  
Adjusting clock more than one minute ahead or  
back:  
Pull out adjustment knob (2), turn to the right  
respectively left and hold until the desired time is set.  
Within the first 2 seconds, the minute hand advances  
8 minutes and advances another 8 minutes every  
additional second thereafter.  
Tachometer  
To reset:  
The red marking on the tachometer denotes excessive  
engine speed.  
• Press adjusting knob (1) once (with key in steering  
lock position 2).  
Avoid this engine speed, as it may result in serious  
engine damage that is not covered by the  
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.  
• Press adjusting knob (1) twice (with key removed or  
in steering lock position 0 or 1).  
To help protect the engine, the fuel supply is interrupted  
if the engine is operated within the red marking.  
Instrument cluster  
79  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Flexible service system  
Flexible service system (FSS)  
80  
The symbols 9 or ´ indicate the type of service  
to be performed:  
(service indicator)  
9 Service A  
´ Service B  
The message is displayed for approximately 10 seconds  
when turning the key in steering lock to position 2, or  
while driving when reaching the service warning  
threshold. It can be canceled manually by pressing  
button (1).  
Once the suggested term has passed, the message plus  
symbol 9 or š, preceded by a – (minus symbol)  
blinks for approx. 30 seconds and a signal sounds every  
time when turning the key in steering lock to position 2.  
The FSS display can also be called up for approx.  
10 seconds with display illuminated by pressing  
button (1) twice within 1 second.  
The FSS permits a flexible service schedule that is  
directly related to the operating conditions of the  
vehicle.  
Following a completed A or B service the Mercedes-Benz  
Center sets the counter to 10 000 miles (Canada: 15 000  
km) and 365 days.  
The symbol 9 or š appears in the main odometer  
display field prior to the next suggested service.  
Depending on operating conditions throughout the year,  
the next service is calculated and displayed in days  
š or distance 9 remaining.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The counter can also be set by any individual. To do so:  
Note:  
When disconnecting vehicle battery for one or more  
days at a time, such days will not be counted. Any such  
days not counted by FSS can be added by your  
Mercedes-Benz Center.  
1. Turn key in steering lock to position 2.  
2. Within 4 seconds press button (1) twice.  
3. The present status for days or distance is displayed.  
Within 10 seconds turn key in steering lock to  
position 0.  
The interval between services is determined by the kind  
of vehicle operation. For example driving at extreme  
speeds, and cold starts combined with short distance  
driving in which the engine does not reach normal  
operating temperature, reduce the interval between  
services.  
4. Press and hold button (1), while turning key in  
steering lock to position 2 again. The present status  
for days or distance is displayed once more.  
Continue to hold button (1).  
Model SL 500  
After approx. 10 seconds a signal sounds, and the  
display shows 10 000 miles (Canada: 15 000 km) for  
approx. 10 seconds.  
The FSS allows for distances between 10 000 miles  
(Canada: 15 000 km) and 20 000 miles (Canada:  
30 000 km), or from 365 to 730 days between services.  
5. Release button (1).  
If the FSS counter was inadvertently reset, have a  
Mercedes-Benz Center correct it.  
Model SL 600  
The FSS allows for distances between 10 000 miles  
(Canada: 15 000 km) and 16 000 miles (Canada:  
25 000 km), or from 365 to 730 days between services.  
However you choose to set your reference numbers, the  
scheduled services as posted in the Service Booklet  
must be followed to properly care for your vehicle.  
Flexible service system  
81  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Checking engine oil level  
82  
Engine oil level indicator in odometer display field  
(Model SL 500)  
The following messages are available:  
“OK”  
“-1.0 Q” (Canada: -1.0 L)  
“-1.5 Q” (Canada: -1.5 L)  
“-2.0 Q” (Canada: -2.0 L)  
If the message “-2.0 Q” (Canada: -2.0 L) blinks and a  
signal sounds, add oil to upper (max) mark of the  
dipstick.  
“HI”  
The message “HI” blinks and a signal sounds.  
Do not overfill the engine.  
Excessive oil must be drained or siphoned. It could  
cause damage to engine and catalytic converter not  
covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.  
Turn electronic key in steering lock to position 2 and  
wait until the symbols : and I appear in the  
odometer display field.  
The symbol I flashes in the odometer display field if  
a proper oil level check cannot be performed.  
Within 1 second press button “1” twice.  
The oil level check can be repeated after a short time.  
Perform the oil level check with the dipstick, if it cannot  
be completed via the odometer display field.  
In this case we recommend that you have the system  
checked at a Mercedes-Benz Center.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Notes:  
Engine oil temperature gauge  
If the symbols : and I are continuously  
illuminated after pressing button (1) twice and there is  
no change in the odometer display field or the low  
engine oil level warning lamp comes on, a malfunction  
has occurred to the system. Perform the engine oil level  
check with the dipstick.  
Normal operating engine oil temperatures are from  
175°F (80°C) to 250°F (120°C).  
During severe operating conditions and stop-and-go  
traffic, the engine oil temperature may rise close to the  
red marking.  
The engine should not be operated with the engine oil  
temperature in the red zone. Doing so may cause  
serious engine damage which is not covered by the  
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.  
If no oil leaks are noted continue to drive to the nearest  
Mercedes-Benz Center to have the system checked.  
Observe the engine oil temperature gauge.  
When the engine oil temperature is close to the red  
marking, relieve the load on the engine by decreasing  
vehicle speed to lower engine oil temperature.  
Fuel consumption gauge  
While driving, instantaneous fuel consumption is  
indicated in miles per gallon (mpg), or in Canada liters  
per 100 kilometers (l/100 km).  
Once the engine oil temperature returns to the normal  
temperature range, the engine oil level should be  
checked. See page 82 or 222.  
With the engine switched off, the needle reads “0”.  
Due to system design, minimum consumption is  
indicated at idle speed.  
Engine oil consumption  
Engine oil consumption checks should only be made  
after the break-in period. During the break-in period,  
higher oil consumption may be noticed and is normal.  
Frequent driving at high engine speeds results in  
increased consumption.  
Checking engine oil level  
83  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Exterior lamp switch  
Exterior lamp switch  
84  
Front fog lamps (pull out one stop) with parking  
lamps and/or low beam headlamps on. Green  
indicator in lamp switch comes on.  
Rear fog lamp (pull out to second detent) in  
addition to the front fog lamps. Yellow indicator in  
lamp switch comes on.  
Note:  
With the key removed and a door open, a warning  
sounds if the vehicle’s exterior lamps (except standing  
lamps) are not switched off.  
Fog lamps will operate with the parking lamps and/or  
the low beam headlamps on. Fog lamps should only be  
used in conjunction with low beam headlamps. Consult  
your State or Province Motor Vehicle Regulations  
regarding allowable lamp operation.  
D Off  
C Parking lamps (also side marker lamps, taillamps,  
Fog lamps are automatically switched off when the  
exterior lamp switch is turned to position D.  
licence plate lamps, instrument panel lamps)  
Canada only: When the engine is running, the low  
beam is additionally switched on.  
B Parking lamps plus low beam or high beam  
headlamps (combination switch pushed forward).  
ˆ Standing lamps, right (turn left one stop)  
Standing lamps, left (turn left two stops)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Standing lamps  
Night security illumination  
When the vehicle is parked on the street the standing  
lamps (right or left side parking lamps) can be turned  
on, making the vehicle more visible to passing vehicles.  
When exiting the vehicle after driving with the exterior  
lamps on, they switch on again for added illumination  
for approximately 30 seconds after closing the last door.  
The lamp-on time period can be changed at your  
Mercedes-Benz Center.  
The standing lamps cannot be operated with the key in  
steering lock position 2.  
Daytime running lamp mode  
When the engine is running and the selector lever is in  
a driving position, the low beam headlamps (includes  
parking lamps, side marker lamps, taillamps and  
license plate lamps) are automatically switched on.  
When shifting from a driving position to position “N”  
or “P”, the low beam switches off (2 seconds delay).  
For nighttime driving the exterior lamp switch should  
be turned to position B to permit activation of the  
high beam headlamps.  
Exterior lamp switch  
85  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Combination switch  
Combination switch  
86  
To signal minor directional changes, such as changing  
lanes on a highway, move combination switch to the  
point of resistance only and hold it there.  
To operate the turn signals continuously, move the  
combination switch past the point of resistance (up or  
down). The switch is automatically canceled when the  
steering wheel is turned to a large enough degree.  
Turn signal failure  
If one of the turn signal lamps fails, the turn signal  
indicator system flashes and sounds at a faster than  
normal rate.  
1 Low beam (exterior lamp switch position B)  
2 High beam (exterior lamp switch position B)  
3 High beam flasher (high beam available  
independent of exterior lamp switch position)  
4 Turn signals, right  
5 Turn signals, left  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7 Windshield wiper  
7
0
I
Wiper off  
Intermittent wiping  
One initial wipe, pauses between wipes are  
automatically controlled by a rain sensor  
monitoring the wetness of the windshield.  
Notes:  
With switch in this position, one wipe occurs  
when turning the key in steering lock from  
position 0.  
6
P54.25-0313-26  
Do not leave in intermittent setting when vehicle  
is taken to an automatic car wash or during  
windshield cleaning. Wiper will operate in  
presence of water spray at windshield, and wiper  
may be damaged as a result.  
6 Press switch briefly:  
One wipe without washer water  
(select only if windshield is wet).  
Press switch past resistance point:  
Windshield washer, windshield wiper;  
headlamp cleaning system only in exterior lamp  
switch positions C or B (except xenon  
lamps).  
II Normal wiper speed  
III Fast wiper speed  
Note:  
Canada only: also in position D when the engine  
is running.  
The windshield washer reservoir, hoses and nozzles are  
automatically heated.  
Combination switch  
87  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Combination switch  
Blocked windshield wiper  
88  
Windshield and headlamp washer fluid mixing ratio  
For temperatures above freezing:  
If the windshield wiper becomes blocked (for example,  
due to snow), switch off the wiper.  
MB Windshield Washer Concentrate “S” and water  
1 part “S” to 100 parts water  
For safety reasons before removing ice or snow, remove  
key from steering lock. Remove blockage.  
(40 ml “S” to 1 gallon water).  
Activate combination switch again (key in steering lock  
position 1).  
For temperature below freezing:  
MB Windshield Washer Concentrate “S” and  
commercially available premixed windshield washer  
solvent/antifreeze.  
Windshield wiper smears  
If the windshield wiper smears the windshield, even  
during rain, activate the washer system as often as  
necessary. The fluid in the washer reservoir should be  
mixed in the correct ratio.  
1 part “S” to 100 parts solvent  
(40 ml “S” to 1 gallon solvent).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Hazard warning flasher switch  
The hazard warning flasher can be activated manually  
via the switch located in the dashboard.  
To activate hazard warning flasher, press switch once.  
To deactivate, press switch again.  
Note:  
With the hazard warning flasher activated, and the  
combination switch in position for either left or right  
turn with key in steering lock position 2, only the  
respective left or right side turn signals will operate.  
P82.25-2055-26  
Hazard warning flasher switch  
89  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Automatic climate control  
Automatic climate control  
90  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1 Air volume control for left air outlet, turn left to  
The system is always at operational readiness, except  
when manually switched off.  
open.  
The automatic climate control only operates with the  
engine running.  
2 Air volume control for center air outlets, turn left to  
open.  
The temperature selector should be left at the desired  
temperature setting. The temperature selected is  
reached as quickly as possible.  
3 Air volume control for right air outlet, turn left to  
open.  
4 Center air outlets, adjustable  
The system will not heat or cool any quicker by setting a  
higher or lower temperature.  
5 Side air outlet, left and right, adjustable  
The automatic climate control removes considerable  
moisture from the air during operation in the cooling  
mode. It is normal for water to drip on the ground  
through ducts in the underbody.  
Push-buttons for center air outlets  
6 Heated air supply  
7 Non-heated/cooled air supply  
Important!  
Basic mode:  
None of the push-buttons (6 or 7) is pressed.  
This vehicle is equipped with an air conditioner system  
that uses R-134a (HFC: hydrofluorocarbon) as a  
refrigerant. Repairs should always be performed by a  
qualified technician, and refrigerant should be collected  
in a recovery system for recycling.  
8 Display and controls, see page 92  
Automatic climate control  
91  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Automatic climate control  
Display and controls  
92  
Press the desired button to activate, indicator lamp is on  
while activated.  
U Automatic mode  
f Raise temperature  
g Lower temperature  
P Defrost  
O Air recirculation  
F Rear window defroster  
b Air distribution, manual  
S Economy mode  
ï Air volume, manual  
T Residual engine heat utilization  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Basic setting - automatic mode  
Economy  
The function of this setting corresponds to the  
automatic mode. However, because the air conditioning  
compressor will not engage (fuel savings), it is not  
possible to air condition in this setting.  
Press U button for automatic mode.  
Simultaneously press both f and g buttons for  
temperature setting of 72°F.  
Press S button to activate.  
Press S button once again to return to previous  
setting.  
Air volume and distribution are controlled  
automatically.  
This setting can be used all year around.  
Automatic climate control  
93  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Defrosting  
Car care  
Index  
Automatic climate control  
94  
Special settings (use only for short duration)  
Defogging windows  
Turn wheels (1 and 3) left to open left and right side air  
outlets (5).  
Switch off O button.  
Press P button. Maximum heated and automatically  
controlled amount of air is directed to the windshield  
and side windows.  
Press U button.  
Press b button repeatedly until air is directed  
upward.  
Press P button once again to return to previous  
setting.  
Turn wheels (1 and 3) left to open left and right side air  
outlets (5).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Rear window defroster  
Air distribution  
(only functions with hardtop installed)  
Turn electronic key in steering lock to position 2.  
To select, press F button.  
To cancel, press F button again.  
Note:  
Press b button repeatedly until the requested  
symbol is displayed.  
Air volume  
Heavy accumulation of snow and ice should be removed  
before activating the defroster.  
Press “-” or “+” side of rocker switch ï until the  
requested blower speed is attained. A choice of 7 blower  
speeds is available.  
The rear window defroster uses a large amount of power.  
To keep the battery drain to a minimum, turn off the  
defroster as soon as the window is clear.  
To switch the automatic climate control off, press  
“-” side of rocker switch ï until symbol OFF is  
displayed.  
The defroster is automatically turned off after a  
maximum of 12 minutes of operation.  
If several power consumers are turned on  
simultaneously, or the battery is only partially charged,  
it is possible that the defroster will automatically turn  
itself off. When this happens, the indicator lamp inside  
the switch starts blinking.  
The fresh air supply to the car interior is shut off.  
While driving, use this setting only temporarily,  
otherwise the windshield could fog up.  
As soon as the battery has sufficient voltage, the  
defroster automatically turns itself back on.  
To switch the automatic climate control on again,  
press U, P, or “+” side of ï.  
Automatic climate control  
95  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Automatic climate control  
Air recirculation  
96  
Residual engine heat utilization  
This mode can be selected to temporarily reduce the  
entry of annoying odors or dust into the vehicle’s  
interior.  
With the engine switched off, it is possible to continue  
heating the interior for a short while.  
Air volume and distribution are controlled  
automatically.  
Outside air is not supplied to the car’s interior.  
To select, press O button.  
To select:  
To cancel, press O button again.  
Turn electronic key in steering lock to position 1 or 0 or  
remove electronic key.  
The system will automatically switch from recirculated  
air to fresh air:  
Press T button.  
• after approx. 5 minutes at outside temperatures  
This function selection will not activate if the battery  
charge level is insufficient.  
below approx. 40°F (5°C),  
• after approx. 30 minutes, at outside temperatures  
above approx. 40°F (5°C),  
To cancel:  
• after approx. 5 minutes, if button S is pressed.  
Press T button.  
The system will automatically shut off:  
Notes:  
• If you turn electronic key in steering lock to  
position 2,  
If the windows should fog up from the inside, switch  
from recirculated air back to fresh air.  
At high outside temperatures, the system automatically  
engages the recirculated air mode thereby increasing  
the cooling capacity performance, switching to partially  
fresh air within 20 minutes.  
• after approx. 30 minutes,  
• if the battery voltage drops.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Dust filter  
Nearly all dust particles and pollen are filtered out  
before outside air enters the passenger compartment  
through the air distribution system.  
Notes:  
Do not obstruct the air flow by placing objects on the air  
flow through exhaust slots below the rear window.  
Also keep the air intake grille in front of windshield free  
of snow and debris.  
Automatic climate control  
97  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Audio system  
98  
Audio and telephone, operation  
Operating safety  
Warning!  
These instructions are intended to help you become  
acquainted with your Mercedes-Benz vehicle radio.  
They contain useful tips and a detailed description of  
the user functions.  
Any alternations made to electronic components  
can cause malfunctions  
The radio, cassette deck, CD changer 1 and  
telephone 1 are interconnected. Therefore, when  
one of the components is defective or has not been  
removed/replaced properly this may impair the  
function of other components.  
Warning!  
In order to avoid distraction which could lead to an  
accident, system settings should be entered with  
the vehicle at standstill and systems should be  
operated by the driver only when traffic conditions  
permit. Always pay full attention to traffic  
conditions first before operating system controls  
while driving.  
These malfunctions might seriously impair the  
operating safety of your vehicle.  
We recommend that you have any service work or  
alternations on electronic components done in an  
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.  
Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph  
(approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is covering  
a distance of approximately 50 feet (approximately  
14 m) every second.  
1
Optional equipment  
Dolby and the double-D symbol Ù are trademarks of Dolby  
Laboratories Licensing Corporation. The Dolby noise reduction  
system is manufactured under licence from Dolby Laboratories  
Licensing Corporation.  
The right to correct errors and make technical amendments is  
reserved.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Operating and display elements  
1 On/off, volume, see page 102  
7 Display panel, see page 106  
2 Telephone mode selector, see page 113  
3 Seek, see page 104, 107 and 111  
4 Radio mode selector, see page 104  
8 Alpha-numeric keypad for  
station storage and frequency entry, see page 105  
optional telephone, see page 113  
Tape eject, see page 107  
Tape track select, see page 107  
Dolby, see page 108  
CD Random/repeat, see page 112  
5 Tune, see page 104 and 105  
Fast Forward/Reverse, see page 108 and 111  
6 CD mode selector, see page 110  
9 Function button, see page 105 and 112  
Audio system  
99  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
100  
Car care  
Index  
Audio system  
10 Soft keys for  
radio band selection, see page 104  
tone controls, see page 102  
scan, see page 105  
11 Tape mode selector, see page 106  
Anti-theft system  
If the power supply to the  
radio has been  
interrupted,“CODE” will  
appear on the display when it  
is next switched on. The radio  
will only work after the five-digit code has been entered  
using the buttons on the right-hand control panel.  
The code number is shown on the Radio code card,  
supplied with the radio.  
Important!  
Never leave the Radio code card in the vehicle. Keep it in  
a safe place.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Entering the code number  
Button and soft key operation  
Switch on the radio.“CODE” will appear on the display.  
Using the buttons on the alpha-numeric keypad, enter  
the five digit code. Confirm by pressing the “OK” key.  
In these instructions, the alpha-numeric keypad (right  
side of radio face) and the function buttons (left side of  
the radio face) are referred to as “buttons” and the four  
keys under the display are referred to as “soft keys”.  
If an incorrect code has been entered and confirmed,  
“CODE” will reappear on the display. The correct code  
must be entered once again.  
Note:  
Do not press directly on the radio display face.  
If an incorrect code is entered  
three times, “WAIT” will  
appear on the display and the  
radio will be locked out for  
about 10 minutes.  
Note:  
The lock out time will only count down if the radio is left  
switched on.  
Audio system  
101  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
102  
Car care  
Index  
Audio system  
Operation  
Audio functions  
The AUD key is used to select the BASS, TREBLE and  
BALANCE functions. Settings for bass and treble are  
stored separately for the radio, cassette and CD modes.  
Tone level settings are identified by the vertical bars.  
The center (flat) setting is shown by one longer bar in  
the center of the display.  
Switching on and off  
Press the control knob  
.
The radio is switched off when the ignition key is turned  
to position 0 or removed from the ignition. The radio is  
switched on again when the ignition key is turned to  
position 1 or 2.  
Bass  
Note:  
Press the AUD key repeatedly  
until “BASS” appears in the  
display.  
The radio can also be switched on even if the ignition  
key is not inserted, but will switch itself off  
automatically after one hour to conserve vehicle battery  
power.  
Treble  
Adjusting the volume  
Press the AUD key repeatedly  
until “TREBLE” appears in the  
display.  
Turn the control knob - turning the knob clockwise will  
increase the volume, counterclockwise will decrease the  
volume.  
Press the “+” key to increase  
or the “-” key to decrease the level.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Balance1  
Centering all audio functions  
Push and hold down the  
Press the AUD key repeatedly  
until “BALANCE” appears in  
the display.  
“AUD” key. All audio  
functions (bass, treble,  
balance and fader) are set to  
center or flat positions, and  
Press the “L” key to move the  
sound to the left speaker or the “R” key to move the  
sound to the right speaker.  
the volume is adjusted to a pre-set level.  
1
not available on all models  
Audio system  
103  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
104  
Car care  
Index  
Audio system  
Radio mode  
Manual tuning  
Press either the  
or  
Selecting radio mode  
Press button.  
button. Step-by-step tuning in  
ascending or descending  
order of frequency will take  
place.  
Selecting the band  
The first three tuning steps will take place without  
muting. The radio will then be muted and high-speed  
tuning will take place until the button is released.  
The following tuning intervals will be shown on the  
display:  
Press the key located below  
the desired band. The band  
selected is shown in the top  
line of the display.  
FM  
AM  
WB  
200 kHz  
10 kHz  
Channels 1-7  
Frequency ranges:  
FM  
87.9 - 107.9 MHz  
530 - 1710 kHz  
approx. 162 MHz  
AM  
WB  
Seek tuning  
Press either the  
or  
button. The radio will tune  
to the next receivable station.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Scan tuning  
Storing stations  
Press the SC key. Each strong  
receivable station on the band  
selected will be tuned in for  
8 seconds. The first scan will  
tune only the stations with a  
Hold the number button down for approximately  
2 seconds. The currently displayed frequency is stored  
on the selected station button. The storage procedure is  
confirmed by a short signal tone.  
high signal strength. The second scan will tune every  
receivable station. By pressing either the  
or buttons, or the “SC” key the scan mode  
Retrieving a station from memory  
,
,
Press the desired station button.  
can be cancelled.  
Direct frequency input (AM and FM only)  
Station memory  
Select the band. Press the  
button and enter the  
desired frequency using the  
alpha-numeric keypad.  
Frequencies outside of the  
Ten stations can be stored in  
the AM and FM bands via the  
alpha-numeric keypad. The  
“0” button corresponds to  
location 10. Weatherband  
frequency ranges (frequencies specified on page 104)  
will not be accepted. The frequency input mode is  
cancelled if no button is pressed within 4 seconds.  
(WB) channels 1 to 7 can be retrieved via the alpha-  
numeric keypad and are preset at the factory.  
Audio system  
105  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
106  
Car care  
Index  
Audio system  
Cassette mode  
The radio will switch to  
cassette mode. Track 1 will be  
played and “SIDE 1”  
displayed. Track 1 is the side  
of the cassette which is facing  
Playing cassettes  
Press the “TAPE” button. When the eject (EJ) key is  
pressed, the display folds down and the cassette slot  
becomes visible. Push the cassette into the slot until it  
engages. The cassette will be pulled in automatically.  
upwards. The cassette deck will automatically detect the  
type of tape and switch the equalization automatically.  
A cassette symbol in the display indicates that a tape is  
in the mechanism. This symbol appears in all modes but  
not in cassette mode.  
Note:  
Do not press directly on the radio display face.  
The cassette will not be ejected when the radio is  
switched off or another mode is selected.  
Return the display panel to its normal position by  
folding it back up and pressing gently on the display  
frame to lock in place.  
If a cassette is in the  
mechanism, cassette mode  
can be selected by using the  
“TAPE” button. If no cassette  
has been inserted, the display  
will show “NO TAPE”.  
Important:  
If the display is in the down position for more than  
20 seconds, 2 successive beeps will be heard. This will  
continue at 5 second intervals until the display is  
returned to its normal position.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Cassette eject  
Track search forwards/backwards  
Press the eject (EJ) key. The display will fold down and  
the cassette will be ejected. Remove the cassette, then  
fold the display back up manually. The radio will switch  
back to radio mode automatically.  
Press the  
button.  
“SEEK FWD” will be shown on  
the display and the track  
search will run the tape  
forwards to the start of the  
next track.  
Note:  
The cassette will not be ejected when the radio is  
switched off.  
Press the  
“SEEK RWD” will be shown  
on the display and the track  
button.  
Important:  
search will run the tape  
backwards to the start of the  
track currently playing. Track search can be interrupted  
by pressing the same button again.  
If the display is in the down position for more than  
20 seconds, 2 successive beeps will be heard. This will  
continue at 5 second intervals until the display is  
returned to its normal position.  
Note:  
Track selection  
The beginning of a track can only be located if there is a  
break of at least 4 seconds between tracks.  
Press the track selection  
(TRK) key. The current track  
will be displayed as “SIDE 1”  
or “SIDE 2”. The track will be  
changed automatically at the  
end of the tape.  
Audio system  
107  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
108  
Car care  
Index  
Audio system  
Fast forward/reverse  
Scanning  
Press the  
button.  
Press the “SC” key. Each track  
on the cassette will be played  
for 8 seconds in ascending  
order.  
“FORWARD” will appear on  
the display and fast forward  
will start.  
Press the  
button.  
Note:  
“REWIND” will appear on the  
display and fast reverse will  
start.  
The beginning of a track can only be located if there is a  
break of at least 4 seconds between tracks.  
Scan will be interrupted if the  
,
,
,
Fast forward/reverse is stopped by pressing the same  
button again, or it will stop automatically at the  
beginning or the end of the tape. The track will  
automatically change at the end or beginning of the tape  
and play will begin.  
buttons or the “SC” key is pressed.  
Dolby NR 1 (noise reduction system)  
To enable optimum  
reproduction of cassettes  
recorded using the Dolby B  
system, press the “AUD” key  
followed by the NR key so the  
“NR” in the display is not highlighted. To turn off  
Dolby B noise reduction, press the “NR” key so the “NR”  
in the display is highlighted.  
1
Dolby and the double-D symbol Ù are trademarks of Dolby  
Laboratories Licensing Corporation. The Dolby noise reduction  
system is manufactured under licence from Dolby Laboratories  
Licensing Corporation.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CD mode  
Replace the CD in its container after use. Protect CDs  
from heat and direct sunlight.  
General notes on CD mode  
Warning!  
Should excessive temperatures occur while in CD mode,  
“TEMP HIGH” will appear in the display and muting  
will take place. The unit will then switch back to radio  
mode until the temperature has decreased to a safe  
operating level.  
The CD changer 1 is a Class 1 laser product. There  
is a danger of invisible laser radiation if the cover  
is opened or damaged.  
Do not remove the cover. The CD changer 1 does not  
contain any parts which can be serviced by the  
user. For safety reasons, have any service work  
which may be necessary performed only by  
qualified personnel.  
Should temperatures occur while in CD mode which are  
too low, “TEMP LOW” will be displayed, but the CD will  
play. It will be sensitive to skipping if you are driving  
over rough roads.  
1
Optional equipment  
Handle CDs carefully to prevent interference during  
playback.  
Avoid fingerprints and dust on CDs. Do not write on the  
CDs or apply any label to the CDs.  
Clean CDs from time to time with a commercially  
available cleaning cloth. No solvents, anti-static sprays,  
etc. should be used.  
Audio system  
109  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
110  
Car care  
Index  
Audio system  
CD changer installed  
Loading/emptying the CD magazine  
Slide the changer door to the right and press the eject  
button . The magazine will be ejected. Remove the  
magazine. Pull out the CD tray until its stop is reached  
and place the CDs in the recess of the tray, label side up.  
Push the tray into the magazine in the direction shown  
by the arrow. Insert the loaded magazine into the  
changer.  
4
2
3
Important!  
1
Close the door after the magazine has been inserted.  
2
Playing CDs  
Press the CD button. The CD most recently played will  
start at the point where it was last switched off. CDs  
stored in the magazine can be selected by using the  
station preset buttons 1-6.  
1 CD changer 1  
2 CD magazine  
3 CD tray  
The magazine slot number of  
the selected CD will then be  
displayed after “CD”. The  
number of the track being  
played will be displayed after  
“TRACK”.  
4 CD  
If a CD changer 1 is installed, it can be operated from the  
front control panel of the radio. A loaded magazine must  
be installed for CD playing.  
1
Optional equipment  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
If there is no CD in the  
selected magazine slot,  
“NO CD” and the  
corresponding slot number  
will be displayed  
Fast forward/reverse  
Press the  
forward.  
button and hold it down for audible fast  
Press the  
reverse.  
button and hold it down for audible  
(e.g.“NO CD3”). After the last track on a CD has been  
played, the next CD will automatically be selected and  
played.  
The search will stop when the  
button is released. The  
relative time of the track will  
be displayed during the  
search. The search mode will  
be canceled if the beginning or end of the CD is reached.  
Skipping tracks forwards/backwards  
Press the  
played.  
button. The next track on the CD will be  
Press the  
button. If the track has been playing for  
Scanning  
more than 10 seconds, it will revert to the start of that  
track. If it has been playing for less than ten seconds it  
will revert to the preceding track. To skip several tracks,  
the respective button must be pressed until the desired  
track is reached. If the beginning or end of the CD is  
reached during the search, the first or last track will be  
played.  
Press the SC key. Each track will be played for 8 seconds  
in ascending order. The search will stop at the track in  
question if the  
,
,
,
buttons or the  
“SC” key is pressed.  
Audio system  
111  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
112  
Car care  
Index  
Audio system  
Random play/repeat function  
Direct track selection  
The tracks of the current CD are played in random order  
when the random feature (RDM) is selected. Press the  
RDM key to switch on, and press RDM again to switch  
off.  
Tracks can be selected directly using the buttons on the  
alpha-numeric keypad. Press the function button,  
followed by the track number.  
When the repeat function  
(RPT) has been selected, a  
particular track can be played  
for as many times as desired.  
Press the RPT key to switch  
on, and press RPT again to switch off.  
Note:  
Both functions cannot be used simultaneously.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Telephone operation  
Entering telephone number and starting dialing  
process  
Various functions of the Mercedes-Benz integrated  
cellular telephone 1 can be performed and displayed via  
the car radio. Further instructions for operating the car  
telephone can be found in the operation guide for the  
cellular telephone 1 .  
Enter the desired telephone  
number using the alpha-  
numeric keypad. The number  
can have up to 32 digits, but  
only 13 of these can be  
displayed. The dialing process is started by pressing the  
SND button. The entered number can be corrected using  
the “CLR” key.  
Switching the telephone on and off  
Switching on: Press the  
button, “TEL” appears in the  
corner of the display.  
Press the CLR key briefly -  
and the last digit will be  
deleted.  
Switching off: Press and hold  
button until the telephone symbol “TEL” no  
the  
Press the CLR key longer - and  
the complete number will be deleted.  
longer appears in the display, or press the “PWR” button  
on the phone’s keypad.  
1
Optional equipment  
Calling up the phone book  
The numbers stored in the telephone memory can be  
called up via either name or number entries. The  
memory contents from the portable phone must be  
downloaded and the telephone menu must be selected  
in order to call up the phone book. Refer to the  
“Memory download” section of the cellular telephone  
operation guide for more information.  
Audio system  
113  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
114  
Car care  
Index  
Audio system  
Switching between name search and number search  
Press ABC key - Name search  
Placing a call  
When a number or a name  
has been selected using the  
method described above,  
press the SND key.  
Press NUM key - Number search  
Searching and selecting phone book entries by name  
Press the ABC key. The current name is shown on the  
display. The stored entries in alphabetical order can be  
Manual repeat dialing (redial)  
The last number entered can be re-selected by pressing  
the SND key once and the call can be placed by pressing  
the SND key a second time. The last dialed telephone  
number is shown on the display. Using the  
or button, the numbers stored in the re-dial  
memory of the telephone can be selected.  
selected using the  
or  
button. By pressing the  
or buttons, the stored entries can be selected  
according to alphabetical initial letters (e.g. A-Adam,  
B-Brown, M-Miller).  
,
,
Searching and selecting phone book entries by  
number  
The abbreviation L and the  
number in the memory are  
shown in the top line of the  
display.  
Press the NUM key. The current number is shown on  
the display. The stored entries can be selected in  
numerical order using the  
pressing the or  
or  
button. By  
buttons, the stored entries  
can be selected in increments of 5 (e.g. Entry no. 2,  
Entry no. 7, etc.).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Accepting incoming call in telephone mode  
Component malfunctions  
With an incoming call, the ringing tone will be heard  
and the message “CALL” appears in the display. Press  
the SND key to answer the call.  
The radio, CD changer 1, and Mercedes-Benz integrated  
cellular telephone 1 are part of a fiberoptic networked  
system. Failure of one of the components can lead to  
malfunctions of the other components. Please contact  
your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center, or call  
Mercedes-Benz Client Assistance Center (in the USA  
only) at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes, or Customer Service (in  
Canada) at 1-800-387-0100.  
Accepting incoming call in tape, CD or radio mode  
If the telephone is activated in the background  
(telephone symbol in the display), then a switch is made  
automatically to telephone when an incoming call is  
received. The audio source is muted, the ringing tone is  
heard and the message “CALL” appears. After the call  
has been terminated, the previously selected audio  
source is resumed.  
1
Optional equipment  
Terminating call  
A current call can be terminated by pressing the END  
button.  
Audio system  
115  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
116  
Car care  
Index  
Interior equipment  
Power windows  
Turn key in steering lock to position 1 or 2.  
Press switch in to resistance point:  
k to open  
j to close  
Release switch when window is in desired position.  
Warning!  
When closing the windows, be sure that there is no  
danger of anyone being harmed by the closing  
procedure.  
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key  
from the steering lock, and lock the vehicle. Do not  
leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with  
access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of  
vehicle equipment can cause serious personal  
injury.  
P54.25-0311-26  
Power window switches located on center console  
The closing procedures can be immediately  
reversed by either pressing the switch k,  
turning the key to the unlocking position, or  
pressing button Œ on the remote control, and  
holding it.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Express opening of door windows  
Synchronizing power windows  
Press switch k past resistance point and release –  
window lowers to fully open position. To interrupt  
procedure, briefly press j or k.  
When opening a door after the power supply was  
interrupted (battery disconnected or low), the window  
will open slightly, indicating that the express feature  
should be resynchronized.  
Note:  
Press j side of power window switch until the  
window is completely closed and hold for additional 2  
seconds. Repeat procedure for each window.  
The power windows can also be closed with the key or  
infrared remote control while locking the vehicle doors  
or trunk, see page 41.  
The automatic full opening procedure of the windows  
should now be restored.  
Important!  
Do not close a door with the windows fully closed while  
the power supply is interrupted (battery disconnected or  
empty). Doing so could damage the window frame.  
The power windows should first be resynchronized.  
After a power interruption, first synchronize the  
windows to enable activation of the soft top.  
Interior equipment  
117  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
118  
Car care  
Index  
Interior equipment  
Roll bar  
If the roll bar was raised using the switch, it will be  
automatically lowered when activating the soft top  
switch.  
The roll bar will be automatically raised in an accident  
or in a potentially dangerous driving situation. A ratchet  
noise can be heard when the roll bar is automatically  
raised.  
The roll bar can be lowered again after an automatic  
deployment by pressing the upper half of the roll bar  
switch (for at least 5 seconds) until the roll bar drive  
mechanism audibly engages. Then press the lower half  
of the switch to lower the roll bar.  
P91.59-0202-26  
The switch is located in the center console.  
Turn key in steering lock to position 2.  
Press switch  
Upper half = to raise  
Lower half = to lower  
The lowering or raising procedure is immediately  
interrupted by releasing the roll bar switch.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Note:  
Warning  
If the indicator lamps in the switch are blinking or if the  
warning lamp in the instrument cluster comes on, then  
a malfunction has been detected.  
This vehicle is a two occupant vehicle. The rear  
storage area should never be used by any persons.  
Raising or lowering of the roll bar could injure rear  
seated occupants.  
In this case, drive only with the roll bar raised until the  
problem has been corrected. Raise the roll bar by  
pressing the upper half of the roll bar switch. The  
indicator lamps in the switch will go out, however, the  
warning lamp in the instrument cluster will stay on.  
Before operating the roll bar switch make sure that  
the roll bar’s path is clear and no persons due to  
inattention are injured by the moving roll bar.  
For your own safety we recommend to drive with  
the roll bar raised, if  
Have the system checked at your authorized  
Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible.  
• the outside temperature is below +5°F (-15°C)  
Important!  
• the soft top is closed and pets are placed in the  
rear storage area.  
The roll bar is intended to be a safety enhancement to  
the other features designed into the vehicle. No system  
in any vehicle can eliminate the possibility of serious  
injury or fatality in an accident. Properly fastened seat  
belts and child restraints must be used!  
Items being transported in the area behind the seats  
should be placed in such a manner as not to affect the  
movement of the roll bar when being raised.  
Interior equipment  
119  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
120  
Car care  
Index  
Interior equipment  
Interior lighting  
2 Interior lamps switched off  
3 Interior lamps switched on continuously  
Reading lamps  
4 Left reading lamp switched on  
5 Reading lamps switched off  
6 Right reading lamp switched on  
1
2
3
4
5
6
Entrance lamps in footwells, exit lamps in doors  
These lamps are switched on and off by the door contact  
switches.  
P68.00-0508-26  
Note:  
Interior lamps  
To prevent the vehicle battery from being discharged, do  
not leave doors open for a long period of time.  
The switches are located above the inside rear view  
mirror.  
1 Interior lamps are switched on, and off (soft fade)  
delayed, when unlocking or locking the vehicle, or  
when opening or closing either door. However, there  
will be no (soft fade) delay when the key is in  
steering lock position 2.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Sunshade, manual  
Warning  
Do not operate the sunshade while driving.  
Adjusting the sunshade while driving could cause  
the driver to lose control of the vehicle.  
P68.60-0209-26  
To close:  
Slide handle of sunshade along Panorama roof and  
engage in lock.  
To open:  
Disengage handle from lock, and guide sunshade until  
fully retracted. Do not let the sunshade snap back.  
Interior equipment  
121  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
122  
Car care  
Index  
Interior equipment  
Power sunshade  
Warning  
Do not operate the sunshade while driving.  
Adjusting the sunshade while driving could cause  
the driver to lose control of the vehicle.  
In case the procedure causes potential danger, the  
procedure can be immediately halted by releasing  
the sunshade switch.  
The switch is located above the inside rear view mirror.  
Turn key in steering lock to position 2.  
1 Press and hold to close.  
2 Press and hold to open.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Sun visors  
Illuminated vanity mirror  
1
1
2
2
P68.00-0506-26  
P68.00-0507-26  
Swing sun visors down to protect against sun glare.  
With the visor engaged in its inner mounting (1), the  
lamp can be switched on by opening the cover (2).  
If sunlight enters through a side window, disengage  
visor from inner mounting (1) and pivot to the side.  
Warning!  
Do not use the driver’s vanity mirror while driving.  
Interior equipment  
123  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
124  
Car care  
Index  
Interior equipment  
Interior  
Storage compartment (eyeglasses compartment) in  
the dashboard  
Warning!  
To help avoid personal injury during a collision or  
sudden maneuver, exercise care when stowing  
things. Put luggage or cargo in the trunk if  
possible.  
Luggage nets cannot secure hard or heavy objects.  
1 Storage compartment (eyeglasses compartment)  
2 Button for storage compartment  
3 Lock  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Opening compartment (1):  
Interior central locking system  
Press button (2).  
Locking:  
Turn master key in lock (3) to the right and remove.  
Unlocking:  
Turn master key back to vertical position.  
Caution!  
Keep compartment lids closed. This will prevent stored  
objects from being thrown about and injuring vehicle  
occupants during an accident or sudden maneuver.  
Note:  
1 Initial position (integrated with vehicle central  
The storage compartments may be locked and unlocked  
by using the master key in lock (3).  
locking system)  
2 Separate locking of storage compartments  
3 Emergency operation  
Interior equipment  
125  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
126  
Car care  
Index  
Interior equipment  
The following storage compartments are part of the  
interior central locking system:  
Separate locking of storage compartments  
Locking:  
• eyeglasses compartment in the dashboard  
• console storage compartments,  
• rear storage compartments.  
Turn master key to position 2 and remove from lock. The  
storage compartments remain locked - even if the  
vehicle is unlocked from the outside.  
Unlocking:  
Integration with vehicle central locking system  
Turn master key to position 1 and remove from lock.  
When locking or unlocking the vehicle from the outside  
by using the master key, the interior storage  
compartments are also locked or unlocked (with lock in  
position 1).  
If the vehicle was locked from the outside, the storage  
compartments remain in the locked mode until the  
vehicle is unlocked again from the outside.  
Note:  
When unlocking a door from the inside, on a vehicle  
previously locked from the outside, the storage  
compartments still remain locked.  
In case of a malfunction the eyeglasses compartment  
can still be opened. To do so, turn the master key to  
position 3, return it to position 1, remove it from the  
lock and press button p.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Armrest  
Console storage compartments  
1
To adjust:  
To open front compartment:  
Press button (1) and slide armrest forward or backward.  
Slide cover (1) back.  
Opening rear compartment:  
Press button (2).  
The compartments can be locked and unlocked with the  
central locking system.  
Interior equipment  
127  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
128  
Car care  
Index  
Interior equipment  
Cup holder  
Warning!  
Keep cup holder closed while traveling. Place only  
containers that fit into the cup holder to prevent  
spills.  
Do not fill containers to a height where the  
contents could spill during vehicle maneuvers,  
especially hot liquids.  
Parcel net in passenger footwell  
A small convenience parcel net is located in the  
passenger footwell. It is for small and light items, such  
as road maps, mail, etc.  
Warning!  
To open compartment:  
Do not place heavy or fragile objects, or objects  
having sharp edges, in the parcel net.  
Slide cover (1) back.  
In an accident, during hard braking or sudden  
maneuvers, they could be thrown around inside  
the vehicle, and cause injury to vehicle occupants.  
To open cup holder (2):  
Lift handle in direction of arrow.  
To close cup holder (3):  
Lift handle in direction of arrow.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Door pockets  
Rear storage compartment  
1
P68.00-0510-26  
P72.10-0418-26  
To open:  
To open compartment:  
Press button (1) and lift cover.  
Caution!  
Lift cover.  
Warning!  
Keep compartment lids closed. This will prevent stored  
objects from being thrown about and injuring vehicle  
occupants during an accident or sudden maneuver.  
For unobstructive inflation of side impact airbags,  
keep door pocket lids closed.  
Interior equipment  
129  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
130  
Car care  
Index  
Interior equipment  
Ashtray with lighter  
Warning!  
Remove front ashtray only with vehicle standing  
still. With the gear selector lever in position “N”,  
turn off the engine and set the parking brake.  
Otherwise the vehicle might move as a result of  
unintended contact with the gear selector lever.  
To remove ashtray:  
Push sliding knob (1) toward the right to eject the  
insert.  
To install ashtray:  
Install insert into ashtray frame and push down to  
engage.  
Ashtray in center console  
By touching the bottom of the cover lightly, the ashtray  
opens automatically.  
Prior to removing the ashtray insert, move the gear  
selector lever to position “N”.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Lighter  
Warning!  
Never touch the heating element or sides of the  
lighter, they are extremely hot, hold at knob only.  
When leaving the vehicle always remove the key  
from the steering lock. Do not leave children  
unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an  
unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle  
equipment may cause serious personal injury.  
Note:  
The lighter socket can be used to accommodate  
electrical accessories up to a maximum 85 W.  
1 Lighter  
Turn key in steering lock to position 1 or 2.  
Push in lighter (1); it will pop out automatically when  
hot.  
Interior equipment  
131  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
132  
Car care  
Index  
Telephone  
Telephone, general  
Warning!  
Never operate radio transmitters equipped with a  
built-in or attached antenna (i.e. without being  
connected to an external antenna) from inside the  
vehicle while the engine is running. Doing so could  
lead to a malfunction of the vehicle’s electronic  
system, possibly resulting in an accident and  
personal injury.  
Your concentration on the road and traffic  
conditions must take priority. Only use the  
telephone1 when road and traffic conditions  
permit.  
Park if you wish to use the handset rather than the  
hands-free device to make a call.  
See separate instruction manual for instructions on how  
to operate the telephone.  
Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph  
(approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is covering  
a distance of approximately 50 feet (approximately  
14 m) every second.  
1
Observe the legal requirements in all countries concerned.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Garage door opener  
The built-in remote control is capable of operating up to  
three separately controlled objects.  
Warning!  
When programming a garage door opener, the door  
moves up or down.  
When programming or operating the remote  
control make sure there is no possibility of anyone  
being harmed by the moving door.  
2
1
Notes:  
Certain types of garage door openers are incompatible  
with the integrated opener. If you should experience  
difficulties with programming the transmitter, contact  
your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center, or call  
Mercedes-Benz Client Assistance Center (in the USA  
only) at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes, or Customer Service (in  
Canada) at 1-800-387-0100.  
3
1 Signal transmitter keys  
2 Indicator lamp  
3 Portable remote control transmitter  
Garage door opener  
133  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
134  
Car care  
Index  
Garage door opener  
For operation in the USA only: This device complies  
with Part 15, Subpart C, Section 209 of the FCC Rules.  
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:  
3. Using both hands, simultaneously push the hand-  
held transmitter button and the desired integrated  
remote control button. Do not release the buttons  
until completing step 4.  
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and  
4. The indicator lamp on the integrated remote control  
will flash, first slowly and then rapidly. When the  
indicator lamp flashes rapidly, both buttons may be  
released (the rapid flashing lamp indicates  
successful programming of the new frequency  
signal). To program the remaining two buttons,  
follow steps 1 through 4.  
(2) this device must accept any interference received,  
including interference that may cause undesired  
operation.  
Warning: Changes or modification not expressly  
approved by party responsible for compliance could void  
the user’ s authority to operate the equipment.  
Note:  
Programming or reprogramming the integrated  
remote control:  
If, after repeated attempts, you do not successfully  
program the integrated remote control device to learn  
the signal of the hand-held transmitter, the garage door  
opener could be equipped with the “rolling code  
feature”.  
1. Turn electronic key in steering lock to position 1  
or 2.  
2. Hold the end of the hand-held transmitter of the  
device you wish to train approximately 2 to 5 inches  
(5 cm to 12 cm) away from the surface of the  
integrated remote control located on the inside rear  
view mirror, keeping the indicator lamp in view.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Rolling code programming:  
3. Firmly press and release the programmed  
integrated remote control transmit button. Press  
and release same button a second time to complete  
the training process. (Some garage door openers  
may requires you to do this procedure a third time  
to complete the training.)  
To train a garage door opener (or other rolling code  
devices) with the rolling code feature, follow these  
instructions after completing the “Programming”  
portion of this text. (A second person may make the  
following training procedures quicker and easier.)  
4. Confirm the garage door operation by pressing the  
programmed button on the integrated remote  
control transmitter.  
1. Locate training button on the garage door opener  
motor head unit. Exact location and color of the  
button may vary by garage door opener brand. If  
there is difficulty locating the transmitting button,  
reference to garage door opener operator’s manual.  
Canadian programming:  
During programming, your hand-held transmitter may  
automatically stop transmitting. Continue to press and  
hold the integrated remote control transmitter button  
(note steps 2 through 4 in the “Programming” portion)  
while you press and re-press (“cycle”) your hand-held  
transmitter every two seconds until the frequency  
signal has been learned. The indicator lamp will flash  
slowly and then rapidly after several seconds upon  
successful training.  
2. Press “training” button on the garage door opener  
motor head unit (which activated the “training  
light”).  
Note:  
Following step 2, there are 30 seconds to initiate  
step 3.  
Garage door opener  
135  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
136  
Car care  
Index  
Garage door opener  
Operation of remote control:  
Erasing the remote control memory:  
1. Turn electronic key in steering lock to position 1  
or 2.  
1. Turn electronic key in steering lock to position 1  
or 2.  
2. Select and press the appropriate button to activate  
the remote controlled device. The integrated remote  
control transmitter continues to send the signal as  
long as the button is pressed – up to 20 seconds.  
2. Simultaneously holding down the left and right side  
buttons for approximately 20 seconds, or until the  
control lamp blinks rapidly, will erase the codes of  
all three channels.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Hardtop or  
Removing hardtop  
panorama roof (optional)  
The removal or attachment of the hardtop can be carried  
out by 2 persons.  
1
Warning!  
Do not place your hands between the hardtop and  
the car body while the hardtop is being locked or  
unlocked. Serious personal injury may occur.  
P65.00-0281-26  
1. Engage parking brake.  
2. Open doors.  
3. Disconnect plug (1) for rear window defroster.  
Hardtop  
137  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
138  
Car care  
Index  
Hardtop  
The unlocking procedure begins after approx.  
2 seconds:  
• The roll bar lowers.  
2
• The indicator lamp in the soft top switch lights  
up.  
• The hardtop unlocks.  
P65.00-0282-26  
4. Within 10 seconds of turning key in steering lock to  
position 2 (engine not running), slide soft top  
switch (2) back and hold.  
Please note, if soft top switch is activated after  
10 seconds have expired, turn the key back to  
position 0 first before the hardtop removing  
procedure can be started again at step 4.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5. After the hardtop has unlocked, remove the key  
from the steering lock and turn radio and telephone  
off to lower antenna. The indicator lamp in the soft  
top switch should go out.  
6. Lift the hardtop vertically from its attachment points  
(3) and locating points (4) and carefully remove to  
the rear. Exercise caution when maneuvering the  
top. To avoid paint damage, the top’s mounting pins  
must not be allowed to contact the body.  
Important!  
Removal of the key from the steering lock is a safety  
measure ensuring that the key cannot be turned to  
position 2 and the soft top switch is without  
function should anybody push the switch forward  
causing the roof locking mechanism to work. If  
hands are at that moment between roof and car  
body they can be badly injured.  
Warning!  
To prevent possible accidents, drive the vehicle  
only with the hardtop either completely closed and  
locked, or fully lowered into its storage  
compartment.  
Hardtop  
139  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
140  
Car care  
Index  
Hardtop  
Attaching hardtop  
1. Engage parking brake and turn key in steering lock  
to position 2.  
5. From the rear of the vehicle, lift the hardtop  
carefully over the attachment points (1) and locating  
points (2). First guide the rear pins of the top  
vertically into the rear attachment points, then  
lower the roof onto the vehicle and locate the front  
locking pins. Exercise caution when maneuvering  
the top. To avoid paint damage, the top’s mounting  
pins must not be allowed to contact the body.  
2. Lower roll bar, see page 118.  
3. Open doors.  
4. Turn radio and telephone off to lower power  
antenna, turn key in steering lock to position 0 and  
remove.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4
3
P65.00-0286-26  
P65.00-0285-26  
6. Turn key in steering lock to position 2. The indicator  
lamp in the soft top switch lights up.  
8. Connect plug (4) for rear window defroster.  
7. Slide soft top switch (3) forward - the hardtop should  
lock and the indicator lamp in the switch should go  
out.  
Hardtop  
141  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
142  
Car care  
Index  
Hardtop  
Notes:  
Warning!  
For safety reasons, the hardtop can only be unlocked  
while the vehicle is standing still, and within  
10 seconds after turning the key to steering lock  
position 2 or beyond.  
The raising or lowering procedure of the soft top is  
not completed if the indicator lamp in the soft top  
switch:  
• does not go out (with key in steering lock  
position 2),  
If the indicator lamp in the soft top switch blinks while  
activating the switch, the battery voltage may be  
insufficient - start engine to charge battery before  
shutting engine off and attempting to unlock the roof  
again.  
• blinks when starting to drive and an alarm  
sounds.  
When safe to do so, immediately stop the vehicle  
and lock the soft top:  
If the indicator lamp continues to blink, remove the  
hardtop (see page 137), and have the system checked at  
your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as  
possible.  
• Turn key in steering lock to position 2,  
• Slide soft/hardtop switch forward.  
Do not drive the car with the hardtop not locked, as  
that could cause personal injury to you or your  
passenger, or personal injury or property damage  
to others.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Soft top  
Warning!  
Before operating the soft top switch make sure that  
no persons due to inattention are injured by the  
moving parts (roll bar, soft top frame and soft top  
lid).  
A minimum height clearance of 6.5 ft (2 m) is required  
to lower or raise the soft top.  
Do not lower a frozen soft top until thawed and dry.  
Doing so may result in damage not covered by the  
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.  
Hands must never be placed near the roll bar, soft  
top frame, upper windshield area or soft top storage  
compartment while the soft top is being locked or  
unlocked. Serious personal injury may occur.  
To prevent mildew, the soft top must be dry before  
lowering it into the storage compartment.  
The soft top should not be lowered or raised at outside  
temperatures below +5°F (-15°C), since the material  
becomes less pliable with lower temperatures.  
The lowering or raising procedure is immediately  
interrupted by releasing the soft top switch.  
Soft top  
143  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
144  
Car care  
Index  
Soft top  
Lowering soft top  
• The soft top is lowered into the soft top storage  
compartment.  
• The storage compartment cover closes and locks.  
• The indicator lamp in the switch goes out - the  
lowering procedure is completed.  
1
If the soft top switch is held or is released and slid back  
again within approx. 2 seconds, the side windows will  
close. If the roll bar was previously in the upright  
position, it will return to that position.  
However, the side windows and the roll bar can also be  
activated using their respective switches.  
Note:  
P65.00-0287-26  
A wet or frozen soft top must not be folded until thawed  
and dry.  
1. Engage parking brake.  
2. Turn key in steering lock to position 2.  
3. Slide soft top switch (1) back and hold:  
• The side windows lower  
• The roll bar lowers.  
• The indicator lamp in the soft top switch lights  
up.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Raising soft top  
1. Engage parking brake  
2. Turn key in steering lock to position 2.  
3. Fold down sun visors.  
4. Slide soft top switch (2) forward and hold:  
• The side windows lower.  
• The roll bar lowers.  
• The indicator lamp in the soft top switch lights  
up.  
• The soft top closes and locks.  
2
Note:  
P65.00-0288-26  
If the soft top does not engage in the windshield  
header attachment points, then release the soft  
top switch. Reach into the grip (3) and guide the  
pins into their respective locks while pulling  
down, slide soft top switch (2) forward again.  
• The indicator lamp in the soft top switch goes  
out - the closing procedure is completed.  
Soft top  
145  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
146  
Car care  
Index  
Soft top  
Warning!  
The soft top is not locked:  
3
• if the indicator lamp in the soft top switch does  
not go out (key in steering lock position 2),  
• if the indicator lamp blinks, and a warning  
sounds for 10 seconds when starting to drive.  
Stop the vehicle and before continuing to drive,  
lock the soft top:  
The key should be in steering lock position 2.  
Slide soft top switch forward.  
P77.30-0331-26  
If the soft top is not locked, it may fold back or  
forward when driving.  
If the soft top switch is held or is released and slid  
forward again within approx. 2 seconds, the side  
windows will close. If the roll bar was previously in the  
upright position, it will return to that position.  
During soft top operation, do not place your hands  
near the roll bar, soft top frame, upper windshield  
area or soft top storage compartment. Serious  
personal injury may occur.  
However, the side windows and the roll bar can also be  
activated using their respective switches.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
For safety reasons, the soft top cannot be unlocked  
while driving.  
If the indicator lamp continues to blink, lock the soft top  
manually. See page 254.  
However, if the soft top is not completely locked, it can  
be locked while driving by pushing the soft/hardtop  
switch forward.  
Have the system checked at your authorized Mercedes-  
Benz Center as soon as possible.  
Note:  
If the indicator lamp in the soft top switch blinks while  
activating the switch,  
If the roll bar was raised automatically, the process of  
raising or lowering the soft top will take somewhat  
longer, as the roll bar must first be lowered.  
• the battery voltage may be insufficient - start engine  
and let run while activating switch,  
Whenever possible, park vehicle in the shade as  
continuous exposure to sun rays can prematurely  
deteriorate the soft top material.  
• the system may be overloaded (for example after  
lowering or raising the soft top approx.  
5 consecutive times) - after approx. 2 minutes the  
soft top switch may be activated again,  
Permanent creases in the plastic window, caused by  
storage of the soft top in the storage compartment,  
cannot be avoided.  
• and the power supply was interrupted (battery  
disconnected or empty), the soft top cannot be fully  
raised or lowered.  
The soft top may become moldy if it is kept in the  
storage compartment for an extended period.  
To raise the soft top, for safety reasons, first remove key  
from steering lock. Lower soft top by hand into  
compartment, and resynchronize the power windows.  
See page 116.  
Therefore, we recommend raising and airing it  
thoroughly with the side windows open (do not expose  
it to the sun) at regular intervals during the wet and  
cold seasons.  
To lower the soft top, first resynchronize the power  
windows. See page 116.  
Soft top  
147  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
148  
Car care  
Index  
Wind screen  
Wind screen  
Installation  
P91.59-0202-26  
1. Raise roll bar partially using switch on center  
console, see page 118.  
The wind screen is stored in a trunk mounted  
container (1) which is fastened by clamps (arrows).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2
2
1
3
4
P65.00-0289-26  
P65.00-0290-26  
2. Position top end of wind screen at bottom of roll bar.  
The hooks at bottom of wind screen must point  
rearward.  
5. Wrap attachment straps around roll bar and insert  
tabs into latches (3).  
6. Tighten straps (4).  
7. Lower roll bar.  
3. Slide wind screen up into roll bar (1), using care not  
to get the attachment straps (2) caught.  
4. Raise roll bar completely.  
Wind screen  
149  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
150  
Car care  
Index  
Wind screen  
Setting up  
Removal  
P65.00-0292-26  
1. Fold down top of wind screen.  
Push top of wind screen fully forward against internal  
stop.  
2. Raise roll bar using switch on center console.  
3. Disconnect attachment strap latches by squeezing  
latch.  
Warning!  
The rear storage area should never be occupied by  
passengers since the vehicle is a 2 seater.  
Furthermore, with the wind screen in place there  
is a risk of injury, should the roll bar be deployed.  
4. Lower roll bar partially.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Antenna  
The antenna extends when switching on the radio and/  
or telephone.  
Note:  
To retract the antenna (e.g. when entering a car wash)  
both radio and telephone must be switched off.  
5
P65.00-0293-26  
5. Pull wind screen down (5) and remove from roll bar.  
The wind screen can be stored in a trunk mounted  
container.  
Wind screen  
151  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Stopping ...................................... 172  
Program mode  
Traveling abroad ........................183  
Cruise control .................................184  
Brake assist system (BAS) ............188  
Antilock brake system (ABS) .......190  
ABS control ................................. 191  
Driving  
Control and operation of radio  
selector switch ........................... 173  
Emergency Operation ................174  
Parking brake ................................ 175  
Driving instructions .......................176  
Drive sensibly - Save fuel ..........176  
Drinking and driving .................176  
Pedals ...........................................176  
Power assistance ........................ 177 Level control system ...................... 196  
Brakes .......................................... 177  
Driving off ................................... 178  
Parking ........................................ 178  
Tires ............................................. 179  
Aquaplaning ................................180  
Tire traction .................................180  
Tire speed rating ........................181  
Snow chains ................................181  
Vehicles with sport package .....181  
Deep water ...................................182  
transmitters ...............................154  
Radio and telephone ..................154  
Telephones and  
two-way radio ..............................154  
The first 1 000 miles  
Electronic Stability Program  
(ESP) ........................................... 192  
Synchronizing ESP .................... 193  
ESP Control Switch .................... 194  
(1 500 km) .................................155  
Maintenance ...................................155  
Tele Aid ...........................................156  
Catalytic converter ........................163  
Emission control ............................164  
Steering lock ...................................165  
Starting and turning off  
the engine ..................................167  
Before starting ............................167  
Starting ........................................167  
Turning off ..................................167  
Automatic transmission ...............168  
Driving .........................................168  
Accelerator Position ...................169  
Selector lever positions .............169  
Maneuvering ...............................172  
Level control  
switch positions .........................196  
Normal Level ...............................197  
Wheel Change Switch ............... 198  
Adaptive Damping System  
(ADS) ........................................... 199  
Adaptive damping system  
adjustment .................................. 199  
What you should know  
at the gas station .......................200  
Fuel supply ..................................200  
Fuel ...............................................200  
Check regularly and  
Winter driving  
instructions .................................182  
Winter driving .............................183  
Block heater .................................183  
before a long trip ......................202  
Contents - Driving  
153  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Car care  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Control and operation of radio transmitters  
Control and operation of radio transmitters  
154  
Telephones and two-way radio  
Warning!  
Radio and telephone  
Never operate radio transmitters equipped with a  
built-in or attached antenna (i.e. without being  
connected to an external antenna) from inside the  
vehicle while the engine is running. Doing so could  
lead to a malfunction of the vehicle’s electronic  
system, possibly resulting in an accident and  
personal injury.  
Warning!  
Please do not forget that your primary  
responsibility is to drive the vehicle. Only operate  
the radio or telephone1 if road and traffic  
conditions permit.  
Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph  
(approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is covering  
a distance of approximately 50 feet (approximately  
14 m) every second.  
Radio transmitters, such as a portable telephone or a  
citizens band unit should only be used inside the  
vehicle if they are connected to an antenna that is  
installed on the outside of the vehicle.  
1
Observe all legal requirements.  
Refer to the radio transmitter operation instructions  
regarding use of an external antenna.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The first 1 000 miles (1 500 km)  
Maintenance  
The more cautiously you treat your vehicle during the  
break-in period, the more satisfied you will be with its  
performance later on. Therefore, drive your vehicle  
during the first 1 000 miles (1 500 km) at moderate  
vehicle and engine speeds.  
Approximately 30 days or 2000 miles (2000 km) prior to  
the next recommended service, the remaining distance  
or days are displayed in the main odometer field. See  
Flexible service system on page 80.  
We strongly recommend that you have your vehicle  
serviced by your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center, in  
accordance with the Service Booklet at the times called  
for by the FSS.  
During this period, avoid heavy loads (full throttle  
driving) and excessive engine speeds.  
Avoid accelerating by kickdown. It is not recommended  
to brake the vehicle by manually shifting to a lower gear.  
We recommend that you select positions “3”, “2” or “1”  
only at moderate speeds (for hill driving).  
Failure to have the vehicle maintained in accordance  
with the Service Booklet at the designated times/  
mileage may result in vehicle damage not covered by  
the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.  
After 1 000 miles (1 500 km) speeds may be gradually  
increased to the permissible maximum.  
The first 1 000 miles  
155  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Tele Aid  
156  
Tele Aid  
Important!  
Shortly after the completion of your Acquaintance Call,  
you will receive a user ID and password via first call  
mail. By visiting www.mbusa.com and selecting  
“Tele Aid” (USA only), you will have access to account  
information and more.  
The initial activation of the Tele Aid system may only be  
performed by completing the subscriber agreement and  
placing an acquaintance call using the “SOS” button.  
Failure to complete either of these steps will result in a  
system that is not activated. If the system is not  
activated, the indicator lamp in the “SOS” button stays  
on after turning electronic key in starter switch to  
position 2.  
System self-check  
Initially, after turning the key in steering lock to  
position 2, malfunctions are detected and indicated (the  
indicator lamps in the “SOS” button, the Roadside  
Assistance button and the Information  
button ¡ stay on longer than 10 seconds or do not  
come on).  
If you have any questions regarding activation, please  
call the Response Center at 1-800-756-9018 (in the USA)  
or 1-888-923-8367 (in Canada).  
Important!  
(Telematic Alarm Identification on Demand)  
Always make sure that the indicator lamps in the  
“SOS” button, in the “Roadside Assistance” button and  
in the “Information” button do not remain illuminated  
constantly in red after the system self check.  
The Tele Aid system consists of three types of response;  
automatic and manual emergency, roadside assistance  
and information.  
The Tele Aid system is operational, providing that the  
vehicle’s battery is charged and properly connected, not  
damaged and the cellular and GPS coverage is available.  
To activate, press the “SOS” button, the Roadside  
Assistance button or the Information button ¡,  
depending on the type of response required.  
If a malfunction is indicated as outlined above, have the  
system checked at the nearest Mercedes-Benz Center as  
soon as possible.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Emergency calls  
The Tele Aid system is available if:  
• it has been activated and is operational. Activation  
requires a subscription for monitoring services and  
cellular air time  
An emergency call is initiated automatically:  
• following an accident in which the Emergency  
Tensioning Retractors (ETR’s) or airbags deploy,  
• the relevant cellular phone network and GPS signals  
are available pass the information on to the  
Response Center.  
• if the antitheft alarm or the tow away alarm stays on  
for more than 20 seconds, see page 42 and page 43.  
An emergency call can also be initiated manually by  
opening the cover next to the interior rear view mirror  
labeled “SOS”, then pressing the button (for longer than  
2 seconds) located under the cover. See below for  
instructions on initiating an emergency call manually.  
Note:  
Location of the vehicle on a map is possible if the  
vehicle is able to receive signals from the GPS satellite  
network pass the information on to the Response  
Center.  
Once the emergency call is in progress, the indicator  
lamp in the “SOS” button will begin to flash. All  
information relevant to the emergency, such as the  
location of the vehicle (determined by the GPS satellite  
location system), vehicle model, identification number  
and color are generated.  
Warning!  
If the indicator lamp in the “SOS” button is  
illuminated continuously and there was no voice  
connection to the Response Center established,  
then the Tele Aid system could not initiate an  
emergency call (e.g. the relevant cellular phone  
network is not available).  
A voice connection between the Response Center and  
the occupants of the vehicle will be established  
automatically soon after the emergency call has been  
initiated. When a voice connection is established the  
audio system mutes. The Response Center will attempt  
to determine more precisely the nature of the accident  
provided they can speak to an occupant of the vehicle.  
Should this occur, assistance must be summoned  
by other means.  
Tele Aid  
157  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Tele Aid  
158  
Initiating an emergency call  
Manually:  
Press the SOS button (2) briefly (for longer than  
2 seconds). The indicator lamp in the SOS button (2)  
will flash until the emergency call is concluded. Wait for  
a voice connection to the Response Center.  
Briefly press on cover (1) – the cover will open.  
Close the cover (1) after the emergency call is  
concluded.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A voice connection between the Roadside Assistance  
dispatcher and the occupants of the vehicle will be  
established. When a voice connection is established the  
audio system mutes. The nature of the need for  
assistance can then be described. The Mercedes-Benz  
Roadside assistance dispatcher will either dispatch a  
qualified Mercedes-Benz technician or arrange to tow  
your vehicle to the nearest Mercedes-Benz Center. For  
services such as labor and/or towing charges may apply.  
Refer to the Roadside Assistance manual for more  
information.  
Warning!  
If you feel at any way in jeopardy when in the  
vehicle (e.g. smoke or fire in the vehicle, vehicle in  
a dangerous road location), please do not wait for  
voice contact after you have pressed the emergency  
button. Carefully leave the vehicle and move to a  
safe location. The Response Center will  
automatically contact local emergency officials  
with the vehicle’s approximate location if they  
receive an automatic “SOS” signal and cannot make  
voice contact with the vehicle occupants.  
These programs are only available in the USA:  
Roadside Assistance button •  
• Sign and Drive services: Services such as jump start,  
a few gallons of fuel or the replacement of a flat tire  
with the vehicle spare tire are obtainable,  
Located below the center armrest cover is the Roadside  
Assistance button . Pressing and holding the  
button (for longer than 2 seconds), will initiate a call to  
a Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance dispatcher. The  
button will flash while the call is in progress. The  
Tele Aid system will transmit data generating the  
vehicle identification number, model, color and location  
(subject to availability of cellular and GPS signals).  
• Remote Vehicle Diagnostics: This function permits  
the Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance dispatcher  
to download malfunction codes and actual vehicle  
data.  
Tele Aid  
159  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Tele Aid  
160  
Notes:  
The Tele Aid system will transmit data generating the  
vehicle identification number, model, color and location  
(subject to availability of cellular and GPS signals).  
The indicator lamp in the Roadside Assistance  
button remains illuminated in red for approx.  
10 seconds during the system self-check after turning  
key in steering lock to position 2 (together with the  
“SOS” button and the Information button ¡).  
A voice connection between the Client Assistance  
Center representative and the occupants of the vehicle  
will be established. When a voice connection is  
established the audio system mutes. Information  
regarding the operation of your vehicle, the nearest  
Mercedes-Benz Center or Mercedes-Benz USA products  
and services is available to you.  
See system self-check on page 156 when the indicator  
lamp does not light up in red or stays on longer than  
approximately 10 seconds.  
If the indicator lamp in the Roadside Assistance  
button is illuminated continuously and there was  
no voice connection to the Response Center established,  
then the Tele Aid system could not initiate an Roadside  
Assistance call (e.g. the relevant cellular phone network  
is not available).  
For more details concerning Tele Aid, please visit  
www.mbusa.com and use your ID and password, sent to  
you separately, to learn more (USA only).  
Notes:  
The indicator lamp in the Information button ¡  
remains illuminated in red for approx. 10 seconds  
during the system self-check after turning key in  
steering lock to position 2 (together with the “SOS”  
button and the Roadside Assistance button ).  
Information button ¡  
Located below the center armrest cover is the  
Information button ¡. Pressing and holding the  
button (for longer than 2 seconds), will initiate a call to  
the Client Assistance Center. The button will flash while  
the call is in progress.  
See system self-check on page 156 when the indicator  
lamp does not light up in red or stays on longer than  
approximately 10 seconds.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
If the indicator lamp in the Information button ¡ is  
illuminated continuously and there was no voice  
connection to the Response Center established, then the  
Tele Aid system could not initiate an Information call  
(e.g. the relevant cellular phone network is not  
available).  
Upgrade Signals  
Tele Aid system processes calls using the following  
priority.  
• Automatic emergency – First priority  
• Manual emergency – Second priority  
• Roadside assistance – Third priority  
• Information – Fourth priority  
Important!  
If the indicator lamps do not start flashing after  
pressing one of the buttons or remain illuminated (in  
red) at any time, the Tele Aid system has detected a fault  
or the service is not currently active, and may not  
initiate a call. Visit your Mercedes-Benz Center and  
have the system checked or contact the Response Center  
at 1-800-756-9018 (in the USA) or 1-888-923-8367 (in  
Canada) as soon as possible.  
Should a higher priority call be initiated while you are  
connected, an upgrade (alternating) tone will be heard,  
and the appropriate indicator lamp will flash. If certain  
information such as vehicle identification number or  
client information is not available, the operator may  
need to retransmit. During this time you will hear a  
chirp and voice contact will be interrupted. Voice  
contact will resume once the retransmission is  
completed. Once a call is concluded, a chirp will be  
heard and the appropriate indicator lamp will stop  
flashing. The audio system operation will resume.  
Tele Aid  
161  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Tele Aid  
162  
Important!  
Stolen vehicle tracking services  
If the indicator lamp continues to flash or the system  
does not reset, contact the Response Center at  
1-800-756-9018 (in the USA) or 1-888-923-8367 (in  
Canada), or Mercedes-Benz Client Assistance at  
1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) in the USA or  
Customer Service at 1-800-387-0100 in Canada.  
In the event your vehicle was stolen, report the incident  
to the police who will issue a numbered incident report.  
Pass this number on to the Mercedes-Benz Response  
Center.  
The Response Center will then attempt to covertly  
contact the vehicle’s Tele Aid system. Once the vehicle  
is located, the Response Center will contact the local  
Law Enforcement and you. The vehicle’s location will  
only be provided to Law Enforcement.  
Notes:  
The indicator lamp in the respective button flashes until  
the call is concluded and this can only be completed by  
a Response Center or Client Assistance Center  
representative.  
Important!  
Tele Aid utilizes the cellular network for  
When a Tele Aid call has been initiated, the audio  
system is muted and the selected mode (radio, tape or  
CD) pauses. The optional cellular phone (if installed)  
switches off. If you must use this phone, the vehicle  
must be parked. Disconnect the coiled cord and place  
the call.  
communication and the GPS (Global Positioning  
System) satellites for vehicle location. If either of these  
signals are unavailable, the Tele Aid system may not  
function and if this occurs, assistance must be  
summoned by other means.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Catalytic converter  
Warning!  
Your Mercedes-Benz is equipped with monolithic type  
catalytic converters, an important element in  
conjunction with the oxygen sensors to achieve  
substantial control of the pollutants in the exhaust  
emissions. Keep your vehicle in proper operating  
condition by following our recommended maintenance  
instructions as outlined in your Service Booklet.  
As with any vehicle, do not idle, park or operate  
this vehicle in areas where combustible materials  
such as grass, hay or leaves can come into contact  
with the hot exhaust system, as these materials  
could be ignited and cause a vehicle fire.  
Caution!  
To prevent damage to the catalytic converters, use only  
premium unleaded gasoline in this vehicle.  
Any noticeable irregularities in engine operation should  
be repaired promptly. Otherwise, excessive unburned  
fuel may reach the catalytic converter causing it to  
overheat, which could start a fire.  
Catalytic converter  
163  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Emission control  
164  
Emission control  
Warning!  
Certain systems of the engine serve to keep the toxic  
components of the exhaust gases within permissible  
limits required by law.  
Inhalation of exhaust gas is hazardous to your  
health. All exhaust gas contains carbon monoxide,  
and inhaling it can cause unconsciousness and  
lead to death.  
These systems, of course, will function properly only  
when maintained strictly according to factory  
specifications. Any adjustments on the engine should,  
therefore, be carried out only by qualified Mercedes-  
Benz authorized Center technicians. Engine  
adjustments should not be altered in any way. Moreover,  
the specified service jobs must be carried out regularly  
according to Mercedes-Benz servicing requirements.  
For details refer to the Service Booklet.  
Do not run the engine in confined areas (such as a  
garage) which are not properly ventilated. If you  
think that exhaust gas fumes are entering the  
vehicle while driving, have the cause determined  
and corrected immediately. If you must drive under  
these conditions, drive only with at least one  
window fully open.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Steering lock  
1 Steering is unlocked.  
(If necessary, move steering wheel slightly to allow  
the key to be turned clockwise to position 1.)  
0
Most electrical consumers can be operated. For  
detailed information see respective subjects.  
1
2 Driving position.  
3 Starting position.  
2
See page 167 for instructions on starting and stopping  
the engine.  
3
Warning!  
When leaving the vehicle always remove the key  
from the steering lock, and lock the vehicle. Do not  
leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with  
access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of  
vehicle equipment may cause serious personal  
injury.  
0 The key can be withdrawn in this position only. The  
steering is locked when the electronic key is  
removed from the steering lock. If necessary, move  
steering wheel slightly to allow the locking  
mechanism to engage.  
The key can be removed only with your foot off the  
brake pedal and the selector level in position “P”.  
After removing the key or with the key in steering  
lock position 0, the selector lever is locked in  
position “P”.  
Steering lock  
165  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Steering lock  
166  
Notes:  
Caution!  
A warning sounds when the driver’s door is opened  
while the key is in steering lock position 1 or 0.  
To prevent accelerated battery discharge and a possible  
dead battery, always remove the key from the steering  
lock. Do not leave the key in steering lock position 0.  
With the engine at idle speed, the charging rate of the  
alternator (output) is limited.  
It is therefore recommended that you turn off  
unnecessary electrical consumers while driving in stop-  
and-go traffic. This precaution helps to avoid draining of  
the battery.  
Unnecessary strain on the battery and charging system  
may be minimized by turning off the following power  
consumers, for example: Heated seats, rear window  
defroster.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Starting and turning off the engine  
Before starting  
Important!  
Due to the installed starter nonrepeat feature, the key  
must be turned completely to the left before attempting  
to start the engine again.  
Ensure that parking brake is engaged and that selector  
lever is in position “P” or “N”. Turn key in steering lock  
to position 2.  
In areas where temperatures frequently drop below  
-4°F (-20°C) we recommend that an engine block heater  
be installed. Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will  
advise you on this subject.  
Starting  
Do not depress accelerator. Briefly turn key in steering  
lock clockwise to the stop and release. The starter will  
engage until the engine is running.  
Turning off  
Turn the key in the steering lock to position 0 to stop the  
engine.  
If engine will not run, and the starting procedure stops,  
turn key completely to the left and repeat starting the  
engine.  
Vehicles with automatic transmission:  
The key can only be removed with your foot off the  
brake pedal and the selector lever in position “P”.  
After several unsuccessful attempts, have the system  
checked at the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz  
Center.  
Starting and turning off the enging  
167  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Automatic transmission  
Automatic transmission  
168  
Shift selector lever to the desired position only when the  
engine is idling normally and the service brake is  
applied. Do not release the brake until ready to drive.  
The vehicle may otherwise start creeping when the  
selector lever is in drive or reverse position.  
The automatic transmission selects individual gears  
automatically, dependent upon  
• Selector lever position  
• Program mode selector  
• Accelerator position  
• Vehicle speed  
Warning!  
It is dangerous to shift the selector lever out of “P”  
or “N” if the engine speed is higher than idle speed.  
If your foot is not firmly on the brake pedal, the  
vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in  
reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and  
hit someone or something. Only shift into gear  
when the engine is idling normally and when your  
right foot is firmly on the brake pedal.  
The gear shifting process is continuously adapted,  
dependent on the driving style, the driving situation  
and the road characteristics.  
Important!  
When parking the car or before working on the vehicle  
with the engine running, firmly engage the parking  
brake and shift the selector lever into “P”.  
Important!  
After selecting any driving position from “N” or “P”,  
wait a moment to allow the gear to fully engage before  
accelerating, especially when the engine is cold.  
Driving  
The selector lever is automatically locked while in  
position “P”. To move the selector lever out of position  
“P”, the service brake pedal must be firmly depressed  
before the shift lock will release.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Accelerator Position  
Selector lever positions  
Partial throttle = early upshifting = normal acceleration  
Full throttle = later upshifting = rapid acceleration  
Kickdown (depressing the accelerator beyond full  
throttle) = downshifting to a lower gear = maximum  
acceleration. Once the desired speed is attained, ease up  
on the accelerator – the transmission shifts up again.  
The automatic gear shifting process can be adapted to  
specific operating conditions using the selector lever.  
Automatic transmission  
169  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Automatic transmission  
Park position  
170  
Neutral  
The park position is to be used when parking the  
vehicle. Engage only with the vehicle stopped.  
The park position is not intended to serve as a  
brake when the vehicle is parked. Rather, the  
driver should always use the parking brake in  
addition to placing the selector lever in park to  
secure the vehicle.  
No power is transmitted from the engine to the  
drive axle. When the brakes are released, the  
vehicle can be moved freely (pushed or towed). Do  
not engage “N” while driving except to coast  
when the vehicle is in danger of skidding (e.g. on  
icy roads, see page 182).  
Important!  
Note:  
Coasting the vehicle, or driving for any other  
reason with selector lever in “N” can result in  
transmission damage that is not covered by the  
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.  
The key can be removed from the steering lock  
only with the foot off the brake pedal and the  
selector lever in position “P”. With the key  
removed, the selector lever is locked in  
position “P”.  
The transmission automatically upshifts through  
5th gear. Position “D” provides optimum driving  
characteristics under all normal operating  
conditions.  
Reverse gear  
Shift to reverse gear only with the vehicle  
stopped.  
Upshift through 4th gear only. Suitable for  
performance driving. To shift from position “D”  
to “4”, push selector lever to the left.  
Depending on the program mode selector switch  
position “S” or “W” the maximum speed in the  
reverse gear is different. However, it is not  
possible to change the program mode while in  
reverse.  
Upshift through 3rd gear only. Suitable for  
moderately steep hills. Since the transmission  
does not shift higher than 3rd gear, this gear  
selection will allow use of the engine’s braking  
power downhill.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Upshift through 2nd gear only. For driving in  
mountainous regions or under extreme operating  
conditions. This gear selection will allow use of  
the engine’s braking power when descending  
steep grades.  
To avoid overrevving the engine when the selector lever  
is moved to a lower driving range, the transmission will  
not shift to a lower gear, if the engine’s speed limit  
would be exceeded. In this case there will be no  
downshift, even when the vehicle speed reaches the  
engine’s speed limit of that gear, e.g. by applying the  
service brakes. Continue driving in the usual manner.  
The transmission will then shift down automatically.  
Use this position, which makes maximum use of  
the engine’s braking effect, while descending  
very steep or lengthy downgrades and only at  
speeds below 40 mph (60 km/h).  
To prevent the engine from laboring at low RPM when  
driving uphill gradients or with your vehicle heavily  
loaded, the automatic transmission will downshift when  
necessary to maintain engine RPM within the best  
torque range.  
Important!  
With selector lever in position “D”, “4” or “3”, upshifting  
from 1st to 2nd to 3rd gear is delayed depending on  
vehicle speed and engine temperature. This allows the  
catalytic converter to heat up more quickly to operating  
temperatures.  
Warning!  
On slippery road surfaces, never downshift in order  
to obtain braking action. This could result in drive  
wheel slip and reduced vehicle control. Your  
vehicle’ s ABS will not prevent this type of loss of  
control.  
During the brief warm-up period this delayed upshift  
and increased engine noise might be perceived as a  
malfunction. However, neither the engine nor  
transmission are negatively affected by this mode of  
operation.  
The delayed upshift is effective with vehicle speeds  
below 31 mph (50 km/h) at partial throttle and engine  
temperatures below 95°F (35°C).  
Automatic transmission  
171  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Automatic transmission  
Maneuvering  
172  
Warning!  
To maneuver in tight areas, e.g. when pulling into a  
parking space, control the vehicle speed by gradually  
releasing the brakes. Accelerate gently and never  
abruptly step on the accelerator.  
Getting out of your vehicle with the selector lever  
not fully engaged in position “P” is dangerous.  
Also, when parked on an incline, position “P” alone  
may not prevent your vehicle from moving,  
possibly hitting people or objects.  
To rock a vehicle out of soft ground (mud or snow),  
alternately shift from forward to reverse, while applying  
only slight partial throttle.  
Always set the parking brake in addition to shifting  
to position “P”.  
When parked on an incline, also turn front wheel  
towards the road curb.  
Rocking a vehicle free in this manner may cause the  
ABS malfunction indicator lamp to come on. Turn off  
and restart the engine to clear the malfunction  
indication.  
When leaving the vehicle always remove the key  
from the steering lock, and lock the vehicle. Do not  
leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with  
access to an unlocked vehicle. Children could move  
the selector lever from position “P”, which could  
result in an accident or serious injury.  
Stopping  
For brief stops, e.g. at traffic lights, leave the  
transmission in gear and hold vehicle with the service  
brake.  
For longer stops with the engine idling, shift into “N”  
or “P” and hold the vehicle with the service brake.  
When stopping the vehicle on an uphill gradient, do not  
hold it with the accelerator, use the brake. This avoids  
unnecessary transmission heat build up.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Program mode selector switch  
Important!  
Always be certain of the program mode selected since  
the vehicle driving characteristics change with the  
selection of the program mode.  
S
Standard mode  
Press switch on symbol “S”. Use this mode for all  
regular driving.  
The vehicle starts out in 1st gear.  
Accelerator Operation:  
Fast on = depressing the accelerator pedal quickly  
(not into kickdown position) while driving  
continuously, rather than depressing the  
accelerator pedal in the usual manner, will cause  
the automatic transmission to shift down into a  
lower gear. This gear shifting process is  
dependent on the current vehicle speed.  
The transmission is provided with a selector switch for  
Standard “S” and Winter/Wet (snow and ice) “W”  
program modes.  
Fast off = there will be no upshift when releasing  
the accelerator pedal quickly, e.g. using the  
engine’s braking power during performance  
driving.  
Caution!  
Never change the program mode when the selector lever  
is out of position “P”. It could result in a change of  
driving characteristics for which you may not be  
prepared.  
Automatic transmission  
173  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Automatic transmission  
Winter/Wet (snow and ice) mode  
174  
W
Emergency operation  
(Limp Home Mode)  
Press switch on symbol "W". The vehicle starts  
out in 2nd gear, except with selector lever in 1st  
gear, or with accelerator pedal in kick-down  
position.  
If vehicle acceleration worsens, or the transmission no  
longer shifts, the transmission is most likely operating  
in Limp Home Mode which engages when there is a  
malfunction of the transmission. This condition may be  
accompanied by the “CHECK ENGINE” malfunction  
indicator lamp in the instrument cluster coming on.  
The "W" mode helps to improve traction and  
driving stability of the vehicle.  
The gear shifting process occurs at lower vehicle  
and engine speeds than in the "S" program mode.  
In this mode only the 2nd gear or reverse gear can be  
activated.  
Important!  
To engage 2nd gear or reverse:  
Dependent on the program mode selector switch  
position “S” or “W” and the gear selector lever in  
position “R”, the ratio of power transmission changes.  
1. Stop the vehicle.  
2. Move selector lever to position “P”.  
3. Turn off the engine.  
4. Wait approx. 10 seconds.  
5. Restart the engine.  
6. Move selector lever to position “D” (for 2nd gear), or  
move selector lever to position “R” (for reverse gear).  
Have the transmission checked at your authorized  
Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Parking brake  
To engage, firmly depress parking brake pedal. When  
the key is in steering lock position 2, the brake warning  
lamp in the instrument cluster should come on brightly.  
P
To release the parking brake, pull handle on instrument  
panel. The brake warning lamp in the instrument  
cluster should go out.  
A warning sounds, if you start to drive without having  
released the parking brake.  
Also see brake warning lamp test on page 205.  
Warning!  
When leaving the vehicle always remove the  
electronic key from the steering lock, and lock the  
vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the  
vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle.  
Children could release the parking brake, which  
could result in an accident or serious injury.  
P42.20-0276-27  
Parking brake  
175  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Driving instructions  
Driving instructions  
176  
Drinking and driving  
Warning!  
Drive sensibly - Save fuel  
Drinking or taking drugs and driving can be a very  
dangerous combination. Even a small amount of  
alcohol or drugs can affect your reflexes,  
perceptions and judgement.  
Fuel consumption, to a great extent, depends on driving  
habits and operating conditions.  
To save fuel you should:  
The possibility of a serious or even fatal accident is  
sharply increased when you drink or take drugs  
and drive.  
• keep tires at the recommended inflation pressures,  
• remove unnecessary loads,  
• allow engine to warm up under low load use,  
• avoid frequent acceleration and deceleration,  
Please don’t drink or take drugs and drive or allow  
anyone to drive after drinking or taking drugs.  
• have all maintenance work performed at regular  
intervals by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.  
Pedals  
Fuel consumption is also increased by driving in cold  
weather, in stop-and-go traffic, on short trips and in hilly  
country.  
Warning!  
Keep driver’s foot area clear at all times. Objects  
stored in this area may impair pedal movement.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Power assistance  
Warning!  
The condition of the parking brake system is checked  
each time the vehicle is in the shop for the required  
maintenance service.  
If the parking brake is released and the brake warning  
lamp in the instrument cluster stays on, the brake fluid  
level in the reservoir is too low.  
When the engine is not running, the brake and  
steering systems are without power assistance.  
Under these circumstances, a much greater effort is  
necessary to stop or steer the vehicle.  
Brake pad wear or a leak in the system may be the  
reason for low brake fluid in the reservoir.  
Brakes  
Have the brake system inspected at an authorized  
Mercedes-Benz Center immediately.  
Warning!  
All checks and service work on the brake system should  
be carried out by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.  
After driving in heavy rain for some time without  
applying the brakes or through water deep enough  
to wet brake components, the first braking action  
may be somewhat reduced and increased pedal  
pressure may be necessary to obtain expected  
braking effect. Be sure to maintain a safe distance  
from vehicles in front.  
Install only brake pads and brake fluid recommended by  
Mercedes-Benz.  
Warning!  
If other than recommended brake pads are  
installed, or other than recommended brake fluid  
is used, the braking properties of the vehicle can be  
degraded to an extent that safe braking is  
substantially impaired. This could result in an  
accident.  
Resting your foot on the brake pedal will cause  
excessive and premature wear of the brake pads.  
It can also result in the brakes overheating thereby  
significantly reducing their effectiveness. It may  
not be possible to stop the vehicle in sufficient time  
to avoid an accident.  
The trunk is the preferred place to carry objects.  
Driving instructions  
177  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Driving instructions  
Caution!  
178  
Parking  
When driving down long and steep grades, relieve the  
load on the brakes by shifting into a lower gear to use  
the engine’s braking power. This helps prevent  
Warning!  
To reduce the risk of personal injury as a result of  
vehicle movement, before turning off the engine  
and leaving the vehicle, always:  
overheating of the brakes and reduces brake pad wear.  
After hard braking, it is advisable to drive on for some  
time, rather than immediately parking, so the air stream  
will cool down the brakes faster.  
1. Keep right foot on the service brake pedal.  
2. Firmly engage parking brake.  
3. Move the selector lever to position “P”  
4. Slowly release the service brake pedal.  
5. Turn front wheels towards the road curb.  
Driving off  
Apply the service brakes to test them briefly after  
driving off. Perform this procedure only when the road  
is clear of other traffic.  
6. Turn the key to steering lock position 0 and  
remove.  
Warm up the engine smoothly. Do not place full load on  
the engine until the operating temperature has been  
reached.  
7. Take the key and lock vehicle when leaving.  
When starting off on a slippery surface, do not allow one  
drive wheel to spin for an extended period with the ESP  
switched off. Doing so may cause serious damage to the  
drive train which is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz  
Limited Warranty.  
Important!  
Always engage the parking brake whenever parking or  
leaving the vehicle. In addition, move selector lever to  
position “P”.  
When parking on hills, always set the parking brake.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Tires  
Warning!  
If you feel a sudden significant vibration or ride  
disturbance, or you suspect that possible damage to  
your vehicle has occurred, you should turn on the  
hazard warning flashers, carefully slow down, and  
drive with caution to an area which is a safe  
distance from the roadway.  
Inspect the tires and under the vehicle for possible  
damage. If the vehicle or tires appear unsafe, have  
it towed to the nearest Mercedes-Benz Center or  
tire dealer for repairs.  
Warning!  
Tread wear indicators (TWI) are required by law. These  
indicators are located in six places on the tread  
circumference and become visible at a tread depth of  
approximately 1/16 in (1.5 mm), at which point the tire is  
considered worn and should be replaced.  
Do not allow your tires to wear down too far. As  
tread depth approaches 1/16 in (1.5 mm), the  
adhesion properties on a wet road are sharply  
reduced.  
Depending upon the weather and/or road surface  
(conditions), the tire traction varies widely.  
The tread wear indicator appears as a solid band across  
the tread.  
Driving instructions  
179  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Driving instructions  
180  
Specified tire pressures must be maintained. This  
applies particularly if the tires are subjected to high  
loads (e.g. high speeds, heavy loads, high ambient  
temperatures).  
Tire traction  
The safe speed on a wet, snow covered or icy road is  
always lower than on a dry road.  
You should pay particular attention to the condition of  
the road whenever the outside temperatures are close to  
the freezing point.  
Warning!  
Do not drive with a flat tire. A flat tire affects the  
ability to steer or brake the vehicle. You may lose  
control of the vehicle. Continued driving with a flat  
tire or driving at high speed with a flat tire will  
cause excessive heat build-up and possibly a fire.  
Warning!  
If ice has formed on the road, tire traction will be  
substantially reduced. Under such weather  
conditions, drive, steer and brake with extreme  
caution.  
Aquaplaning  
Depending on the depth of the water layer on the road,  
aquaplaning may occur, even at low speeds and with  
new tires. Reduce vehicle speed, avoid track grooves in  
the road and apply brakes cautiously in the rain.  
We recommend M+S rated radial-ply tires for the winter  
season for all four wheels to insure normal balanced  
handling characteristics. On packed snow, they can  
reduce your stopping distance as compared with  
summer tires. Stopping distance, however, is still  
considerably greater than when the road is not snow or  
ice covered.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Tire speed rating  
Snow chains  
Use only snow chains that are tested and recommended  
by Mercedes-Benz. Your authorized Mercedes-Benz  
Center will be glad to advise you on this subject.  
Vehicles without Sport Package:  
Your vehicle is factory equipped with “W”-rated tires,  
which have a speed rating of 168 mph (270 km/h).  
Chains should only be used on the rear wheels. Follow  
the manufacturer’s mounting instructions.  
Vehicles with Sport Package:  
Your vehicle is factory equipped with “V”-rated tires,  
which are permissible for speeds over 149 mph  
(240 km/h).  
Snow chains should only be driven on snow covered  
roads at speeds not to exceed 30 mph (50 km/h).  
Remove chains as soon as possible when driving on  
roads without snow.  
Despite the tire rating, local speed limits should be  
obeyed. Use prudent driving speeds appropriate to  
prevailing conditions.  
When driving with snow chains, press the ESP control  
switch to OFF, see page 194.  
Warning!  
Vehicles with Sport Package  
Even when permitted by law, never operate a  
vehicle at speeds greater than the maximum speed  
rating of the tires.  
Use of snow chains is not permissible with tire sizes  
245/40 ZR 18 or 275/35 ZR 18.  
Exceeding the maximum speed for which tires are  
rated can lead to sudden tire failure causing loss of  
vehicle control and resulting in personal injury  
and possible death.  
Driving instructions  
181  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Driving instructions  
182  
Deep water  
Caution!  
when traveling at length on salt-strewn roads. This can  
bring road salt impaired braking efficiency back to  
normal. A prerequisite is, however, that this be done  
without endangering other drivers on the road.  
Do not drive through flooded areas or water of unknown  
depth.  
If the vehicle is parked after being driven on salt treated  
roads, the braking efficiency should be tested as soon as  
possible after driving is resumed while observing the  
safety rules in the previous paragraph.  
If you must drive through deep water, drive slowly to  
prevent water from entering the engine compartment or  
passenger compartment, being ingested by the air  
intake, possibly causing damage to electrical  
components or wiring, to engine or transmission that is  
not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.  
Warning!  
If the vehicle becomes stuck in snow, make sure  
that snow is kept clear of the exhaust pipe and  
from around the vehicle with engine running.  
Otherwise, deadly carbon monoxide (CO) gases may  
enter vehicle interior resulting in unconsciousness  
and death.  
Winter driving instructions  
The most important rule for slippery or icy roads is to  
drive sensibly and to avoid abrupt acceleration, braking  
and steering maneuvers. Do not use the cruise control  
system under such conditions.  
To assure sufficient fresh air ventilation, open a  
window slightly on the side of the vehicle not  
facing the wind.  
When the vehicle is in danger of skidding, move  
selector lever to position “N”. Try to keep the vehicle  
under control by corrective steering action.  
Road salts and chemicals can adversely affect braking  
efficiency. Increased pedal force may become necessary  
to produce the normal brake effect. We therefore  
recommend depressing the brake pedal periodically  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Winter driving  
Note:  
In winter operation, the maximum effectiveness of the  
antilock brake system (ABS) or electronic stability  
program (ESP) can only be achieved with M+S rated  
radial-ply tires and/or snow chains recommended by  
Mercedes-Benz. Snow chains maximize performance.  
Have your vehicle winterized at your authorized  
Mercedes-Benz Center before the onset of winter.  
• Change the engine oil if the engine contains an oil  
which is not approved for winter operation. For  
viscosity (SAE/CCMC class) and filling quantity,  
see page 277.  
Block heater (for Canada only)  
• Check engine coolant anticorrosion/antifreeze  
concentration.  
The engine is equipped with a block heater.  
The electrical cable may be installed at your authorized  
Mercedes-Benz Center.  
• Additive for the windshield washer and headlamp  
cleaning system: Add MB Concentrate “S” to a  
premixed windshield washer solvent/antifreeze  
which is formulated for below freezing  
temperatures, see page 88.  
Traveling abroad  
Abroad, there is a widely-spread Mercedes-Benz service  
network at your disposal. If you plan to travel into areas  
which are not listed in the index of your Center  
directory, you should request pertinent information  
from your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.  
• Test battery: Battery capacity drops with decreasing  
ambient temperature. A well charged battery helps  
to ensure that the engine can be started, even at low  
ambient temperatures.  
• Tires: We recommend M+S rated radial-ply tires on  
all four wheels for the winter season. Observe  
permissible maximum speed for M+S rated  
radial-ply tires and the legal speed limit.  
Driving instructions  
183  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Driving systems  
184  
Cruise control  
2 Decelerate and set:  
Depress lever briefly to set speed.  
Hold lever down to decelerate.  
Normally the vehicle is accelerated to the desired  
speed with the accelerator.  
Speed is set by briefly pushing the lever to  
position 1 or 2. The accelerator can then be  
released.  
The speed can be increased (e.g. for passing) by  
using the accelerator. After the accelerator is  
released, the previously set speed will be resumed  
automatically.  
If a set speed is to be increased or decreased  
slightly, e. g. to adapt to the traffic flow, hold lever in  
position 1 or 2 until the desired speed is reached, or  
briefly tip the lever in the appropriate direction for  
increases or decreases in 0.6 mph (1 km/h)  
increments. When the lever is released, the newly  
set speed remains.  
The cruise control allows you to drive in a more relaxed  
manner, for example over long distances, as it  
automatically maintains the set speed by actively  
regulating the throttle setting.  
Any given speed above approximately 25 mph  
(40 km/h) can be maintained with the cruise control by  
operating the lever.  
1 Accelerate and set:  
Lift lever briefly to set speed. Hold lever up to  
accelerate.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3 Canceling  
4 Resume  
If the lever is briefly pushed to position 4 when  
To cancel the cruise control, briefly push lever to  
position 3.  
driving at a speed exceeding approx. 25 mph  
(40 km/h), the vehicle resumes the speed which  
was set prior to the cancellation of the cruise  
control. The last memorized speed is canceled when  
the key in the steering lock is turned to position 1  
or 0.  
When you step on the brake pedal or the vehicle  
speed drops below approx. 25 mph (40 km/h), for  
example when driving upgrade, the cruise control  
will be canceled.  
If the cruise control cancels by itself and remains  
inoperative until the engine is restarted, have the  
system checked at your authorized Mercedes-Benz  
Center as soon as possible.  
Driving systems  
185  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Driving systems  
186  
Important!  
Warning!  
Moving gear selector lever to position “N” switches the  
cruise control off.  
Only use the cruise control if the traffic and  
weather conditions make it advisable to travel at a  
steady speed.  
• The use of cruise control can be dangerous on  
winding roads or in heavy traffic because  
conditions do not allow safe driving at a steady  
speed.  
• The use of cruise control can be dangerous on  
slippery roads. Rapid changes in tire adhesion  
can result in wheel spin and loss of control.  
The “Resume” function should only be operated if  
the driver is fully aware of the previously set speed  
and wishes to resume this particular preset speed.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Notes:  
As soon as the grade eases, the automatic transmission  
shifts up again dependent on the selector lever position.  
If the engine does not brake the vehicle sufficiently  
while driving on a downgrade, the speed you set on the  
cruise control may be exceeded. In this case the  
automatic transmission shifts down (max. to 3rd gear)  
to maintain the set cruise control speed by using the  
engine’s braking power.  
Nevertheless, in some cases you may have to step on the  
brake pedal to slow down. In this case the cruise control  
is switched off.  
Use the lever to resume the previously set speed.  
Driving systems  
187  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Driving systems  
188  
Brake assist system (BAS)  
The BAS is designed to maximize the vehicle’s braking  
capability during emergency braking maneuvers by  
having maximum power boost applied to the brakes  
more quickly in emergency braking conditions than  
might otherwise be afforded solely by the driver’s  
braking style. This can help reduce braking distances  
over what ordinary driving and braking style might do.  
The BAS complements the antilock brake system (ABS).  
Warning!  
BAS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics  
from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase  
braking efficiency beyond that afforded by the  
condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the  
traction afforded. The BAS cannot prevent  
accidents, including those resulting from excessive  
speed in turns, following another vehicle too  
closely, or aquaplaning. Only a safe, attentive, and  
skillful driver can prevent accidents. The  
capabilities of a BAS equipped car must never be  
exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which  
could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of  
others.  
Applying the brakes very quickly results in maximum  
BAS assistance.  
To receive the benefit of the system you must apply  
continuous full braking power during the stopping  
sequence. Do not reduce brake pedal pressure.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Once the brake pedal is released, the BAS is deactivated.  
If the charging voltage falls below 10 volts, the  
malfunction indicator lamp comes on and the BAS is  
switched off. When the voltage is above this value again,  
the malfunction indicator lamp should go out and the  
BAS is operational.  
The malfunction indicator lamps for the ESP are  
combined with the BAS malfunction indicator lamp.  
The BAS/ESP malfunction indicator lamps in the  
instrument cluster come on with the key in steering lock  
position 2 and should go out with the engine running.  
With the ABS malfunctioning, the BAS and ESP is also  
switched off. Both malfunction indicator lamps come on  
with the engine running.  
If the BAS/ESP malfunction indicator lamp comes on  
permanently while the engine is running, a malfunction  
has been detected in either system. As a result, it is  
possible that now only partial engine output will be  
available, and pressing the accelerator pedal will  
require more effort. If the BAS malfunctions, the brake  
system functions in the usual manner, but without BAS.  
If a BAS warning message is displayed, have the BAS  
and ESP checked at your authorized Mercedes-Benz  
Center as soon as possible.  
Driving systems  
189  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Driving systems  
190  
Antilock brake system (ABS)  
At the instant one of the wheels is about to lock up, a  
slight pulsation can be felt in the brake pedal,  
indicating that the ABS is in the regulating mode. Keep  
firm and steady pressure on the brake pedal while  
experiencing the pulsation.  
Warning!  
Do not pump the brake pedal, rather use firm,  
steady brake pedal pressure. Pumping the brake  
pedal defeats the purpose for ABS and significantly  
reduces braking effectiveness.  
Continuous steady brake pedal pressure results in  
applying the advantages of the ABS, namely braking  
power and ability to steer the vehicle.  
Important!  
In the case of an emergency brake maneuver keep  
continuous full pressure on the brake pedal. In this  
manner only can the ABS be most effective.  
The ABS improves steering control of the vehicle during  
hard braking maneuvers.  
On slippery road surfaces, the ABS will respond even  
with light brake pedal pressure because of the  
increased likelihood of locking wheels. The pulsating  
brake pedal can be an indication of hazardous road  
conditions and functions as a reminder to take extra  
care while driving.  
The ABS prevents the wheels from locking up above a  
vehicle speed of approximately 5 mph (8 km/h)  
independent of road surface conditions.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ABS control  
Warning!  
The ABS malfunction indicator lamp - in the  
instrument cluster comes on with the key in steering  
lock position 2 and should go out with the engine  
running.  
ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics  
from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the  
traction made available by the road conditions. The  
ABS cannot prevent accidents, including those  
resulting from excessive speed in turns, following  
another vehicle too closely, or aquaplaning. Only a  
safe, attentive, and skillful driver can prevent  
accidents. The capabilities of an ABS equipped  
vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or  
dangerous manner which could jeopardize the  
user’s safety or the safety of others.  
When the ABS malfunction indicator lamp symbol and  
warning in the instrument cluster comes on while the  
engine is running, it indicates that the ABS has detected  
a malfunction and has switched off. In this case, the  
brake system functions in the usual manner, but  
without antilock assistance.  
With the ABS malfunctioning, the BAS and ESP are also  
switched off. Both malfunction indicator lamps come on  
with the engine running.  
Note:  
To alert following vehicles to slippery road conditions  
you discover, operate your hazard warning flashers as  
appropriate.  
If the charging voltage falls below 10 volts, the  
malfunction indicator lamp comes on and the ABS is  
switched off. When the voltage is above this value again,  
the malfunction indicator lamp should go out and the  
ABS is operational.  
If the ABS malfunction indicator light stays illuminated,  
have the system checked at your authorized Mercedes-  
Benz Center as soon as possible.  
Driving systems  
191  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Driving systems  
192  
Electronic stability program (ESP)  
Important!  
If the ESP warning lamp v flashes:  
Warning!  
• During take-off apply as little throttle as possible.  
• While driving ease up on the accelerator.  
ESP cannot prevent the natural laws of physics  
from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the  
traction afforded. The ESP cannot prevent  
accidents, including those resulting from excessive  
speed in turns, or aquaplaning. Only a safe,  
attentive, and skillful driver can prevent accidents.  
The capabilities of an ESP equipped vehicle must  
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous  
manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety or  
the safety of others.  
• Adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road  
conditions.  
• Do not switch off the ESP.  
Caution!  
If the vehicle is towed with the front axle raised  
(see page 241), the engine must be shut off (key in  
steering lock position 0 or 1). Otherwise, the ESP will  
immediately be engaged and will apply the rear wheel  
brakes.  
The ESP enhances directional control and reduces  
driving wheel spin of the vehicle under various driving  
conditions.  
Over/understeering of the vehicle is counteracted by  
applying brakes to the appropriate wheel to create a  
countervailing vehicle movement. Engine torque is also  
limited. The ESP warning lamp, located in the  
speedometer dial, starts to flash when ESP is in  
operation.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Notes:  
Driving the vehicle with varied size tires will cause the  
wheels to rotate at different speeds, therefore the ESP  
may activate (yellow ESP warning lamp in speedometer  
dial comes on). For this reason, all wheels, including the  
spare wheel, must have the same tire outside diameter.  
The malfunction indicator lamp for the ESP is combined  
with that of the BAS.  
The yellow BAS/ESP malfunction indicator lamp in the  
instrument cluster and the yellow ESP warning  
lamp v in the speedometer dial come on with the  
key in steering lock position 2. They should go out with  
the engine running.  
When testing the parking brake on a brake test  
dynamometer, the engine must be shut off. Otherwise,  
the ESP will immediately be engaged and will apply the  
rear wheel brakes.  
If the BAS/ESP malfunction indicator lamp comes on  
permanently with the engine running, a malfunction  
has been detected in either system. Only partial engine  
output will be available.  
In winter operation, the maximum effectiveness of the  
ESP is only achieved with Mercedes-Benz recommended  
M+S rated radial-ply tires and/or snow chains.  
If the BAS malfunctions, the brake system functions in  
the usual manner, but without BAS.  
Synchronizing ESP  
If the power supply was interrupted (battery  
disconnected or empty), the BAS/ESP malfunction  
indicator lamp may be illuminated with the engine  
running.  
If the BAS/ESP malfunction indicator lamp comes on,  
have the BAS or ESP checked at your authorized  
Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible.  
With the ABS malfunctioning, the ESP is also switched  
off.  
Turn steering wheel completely to the left and then to  
the right. The BAS/ESP malfunction indicator lamp  
should go out.  
Driving systems  
193  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Driving systems  
194  
ESP control switch  
Warning!  
When the ESP warning lamp is illuminated  
continuously, the ESP is switched off.  
Adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road  
conditions.  
With the ESP system switched off, the engine torque  
reduction feature is cancelled. Therefore, the enhanced  
vehicle stability offered by ESP is unavailable.  
Adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road  
conditions.  
A portion of the ESP system remains active, even with  
the switch in the OFF position.  
If one drive wheel loses traction and begins to spin, the  
brake is applied until the wheel regains sufficient  
traction. The traction control engages at vehicle speeds  
up to approximately 24 mph (40 km/h), and switches off  
at 50 mph (80 km/h).  
ESP control switch located in center console.  
To improve the vehicle’s traction when driving with  
snow chains, or starting off in deep snow, sand or gravel,  
switch off ESP by pressing the upper half of the ESP  
switch. The ESP warning lamp v, located in the  
speedometer dial, is continuously illuminated.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Note:  
Warning!  
Avoid spinning of one drive wheel. This may cause  
serious damage to the drive train which is not covered  
by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.  
ESP should not be switched off during normal  
driving other than in circumstances described  
above. Disabling of the system will reduce vehicle  
stability in standard driving maneuvers.  
The ESP warning lamp, located in the speedometer dial,  
starts to flash at any vehicle speed as soon as the tires  
lose traction and the wheels begin to spin.  
Important!  
If the ESP warning lamp flashes:  
• during take-off, apply as little throttle as possible,  
• while driving, ease up on the accelerator.  
To return to the enhanced vehicle stability offered by  
ESP: press lower half of the switch (the ESP warning  
lamp in the speedometer dial goes out).  
Driving systems  
195  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Driving systems  
196  
Level control system  
Level control switch positions  
(SL 600 only)  
Press upper half of switch once for option 1. One  
indicator lamp lights up.  
Press upper half of switch twice for option 2. Both  
indicator lamps light up.  
1
Note:  
2
The indicator lamps blink at first, and stay on  
continuously once the selected level is attained.  
Press lower half of switch once:  
From option 2, system switches to option 1. Only one  
indicator lamp is illuminated.  
P32.35-0219-26  
From option 1, system returns to Normal Level. Indicator  
lamp goes out.  
The switch is located next to the exterior lamp switch  
Press lower half of switch twice:  
1 Level control switch  
From option 2, system returns to Normal Level. Both  
indicator lamps go out.  
2 Wheel change switch  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Normal level  
Notes:  
Used for normal operation of the vehicle.  
When exceeding approximately 60 mph (95 km/h), the  
system switches from option 1 back to Normal Level.  
The indicator lamp will go out.  
At speeds above approximately 60 mph (95 km/h) the  
vehicle chassis is lowered automatically by about one  
half inch (15 mm).  
If speed exceeds 35 mph (60 km/h) but does not exceed  
60 mph (95 km/h), the vehicle chassis will be  
automatically raised again by one half inch (15 mm)  
when vehicle speed drops below approx. 35 mph  
(60 km/h).  
Option 1  
Level increases one half inch (15 mm)  
This setting may be used when road surface conditions  
are rough.  
Option 2  
When option 1 is selected, the vehicle chassis is raised  
by one half inch (15 mm) at vehicle speeds up to approx.  
35 mph (60 km/h).  
Level increases one inch (30 mm)  
This setting may be used when road surface conditions  
are very rough for increased ground clearance.  
At speeds between approximately 35 mph (60 km/h)  
and 60 mph (95 km/h) the vehicle chassis is lowered to  
its normal level.  
Upon selection of option 2 the vehicle chassis is raised  
by one inch (30 mm). This option can only be selected at  
vehicle standstill, and the raised level is only retained  
up to speeds of approximately 15 mph (25 km/h).  
At speeds above approximately 60 mph (95 km/h) the  
vehicle chassis is lowered an additional one half inch  
(15 mm).  
At speeds between approximately 15 mph (25 km/h)  
and 35 mph (60 km/h) the vehicle chassis is lowered by  
one half inch (15 mm).  
Driving systems  
197  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Driving systems  
198  
At speeds between approximately 35 mph (60 km/h)  
and 60 mph (95 km/h) the vehicle chassis is lowered to  
its normal level.  
Wheel change switch (2)  
Prior to changing a wheel, depress wheel change switch  
with engine running. The indicator lamp in the switch  
and ADS malfunction indicator lamp light up. The  
presently selected level option cannot be changed now.  
After activating the wheel change switch turn off the  
engine.  
At speeds above approximately 60 mph (95 km/h) the  
vehicle chassis is lowered an additional one half inch  
(15 mm).  
Notes:  
When exceeding approximately 35 mph (60 km/h), the  
system will switch from option 2 to option 1. Only one  
indicator lamp will be illuminated.  
Warning!  
Do not drive the vehicle while the wheel change  
switch is activated since the vehicle suspension  
will not function properly.  
When exceeding approximately 60 mph (95 km/h) the  
system will switch from option 1 to Normal Level. The  
indicator lamp will go out.  
If speed exceeds approx. 35 mph (60 km/h) but does not  
exceed 60 mph (95 km/h), the system will switch from  
option 2 to option 1 when vehicle speeds drop below  
approximately 35 mph (60 km/h).  
If speed does not exceed 35 mph (60 km/h), the system  
will switch from option 2 to option 1 when driving on  
after the vehicle has been stopped.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Adaptive Damping System (ADS)  
Adaptive damping system adjustment  
(SL 600 only)  
Depending upon road surface conditions, load, driving  
style, ADS will automatically adjust the optimal ride  
firmness.  
The malfunction indicator lamp comes on with the key  
in steering lock position 2 and should go out with the  
engine running.  
If the malfunction indicator lamp stays on after the  
engine is running or comes on while driving, then the  
system has detected a malfunction.  
Have the ADS checked at your authorized  
Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible.  
The switch is located in the center console.  
Note:  
If the power supply was interrupted (battery  
disconnected or empty), the malfunction indicator lamp  
will light up when the engine is running.  
1 Firm dampening program. This setting should be  
used for sporty driving. During the setting for sporty  
driving the indicator lamp in the switch lights up.  
Turn the steering wheel from full left to full right lock  
position. The light should go out.  
2 Soft dampening program. This setting should be  
used for regular driving.  
Driving systems  
199  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
What you should know at the gas station  
What you should know at the gas station  
200  
Fuel  
To prevent fuel vapors from escaping into open air, fully  
insert filler nozzle unit.  
Only fill fuel tank until the filler nozzle unit cuts out —  
do not top up or overfill.  
Warning!  
Overfilling of fuel tank may result in creating  
pressure in the system which could cause a gas  
discharge such as the gas spraying back out upon  
removing the filler nozzle which could cause  
personal injury.  
Fuel supply  
Open flap by pushing near front (arrow). Turn fuel cap  
to the left and hold on to it until possible pressure in  
tank has been released, then remove cap. Failure to  
remove slowly could result in personal injury.  
Leaving the engine running and the fuel cap open can  
cause the “CHECK ENGINE” lamp to illuminate, see  
page 204.  
Warning!  
Fuel tank capacity approx. 21.1 US gal (80.0 l).  
This includes approx. 2.6 US gal (10.0 l) reserve.  
Gasoline is highly flammable and poisonous. It  
burns violently and can cause serious injury.  
Whenever you are around gasoline, avoid inhaling  
fumes and skin contact, extinguish all smoking  
materials. Never allow sparks, flame or smoking  
materials near gasoline!  
Use premium unleaded gasoline:  
Posted Octane Index 91 (Average of 96 RON/86 MON).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Engine oil  
Bulbs  
High and low beams: Halogen type 9004,  
Engine oil level check, see page 82 or 222.  
low beam: Xenon, for model SL 600 (SL 500  
optional)  
high beam (models with Xenon): H 1 (55 W)  
fog lamps: H1 (55 W),  
Fill quantity between upper and lower dipstick  
marking level: 2.1 US qt (2.0 l).  
Recommended engine oils, see page 277.  
turn signal, standing, side marker and parking  
lamps, front: 2357 NA (28.5/8.3 W/30/2.2 cp), tail,  
parking, standing and driver’s side rear fog lamp:  
21/4 W,  
Coolant  
For normal replenishing, use water (potable water  
quality).  
turn signal lamps, rear: 21 W/32 cp,  
side marker lamps, rear: 10W/6 cp,  
stop lamps: 21 W/32 cp,  
For further information (e.g. anticorrosion/  
antifreeze), see page 225.  
Spark plugs  
backup lamps: 21 W/32 cp,  
license plate lamps: 5W/4 cp.  
Approved spark plugs, see page 276.  
Tire pressure  
For tire pressure, refer to tire pressure label inside  
the fuel filler flap.  
Air conditioner  
R-134a refrigerant and special PAG lubricant,  
see page 277.  
What you should know at the gas station  
201  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Check regularly and before a long trip  
Check regularly and before a long trip  
202  
1 Coolant level  
See “Adding coolant” on page 224.  
2 Windshield washer and  
headlamp cleaning system  
For refilling reservoir see page 226.  
3 Engine oil level  
See “Checking engine oil level” on page 222 and  
“Engine oil level indicator” on page 82.  
4 Brake fluid  
See “Brake fluid” on page 279.  
Opening hood, see page 220.  
Vehicle lighting: Check function and cleanliness. For  
replacement of light bulbs, see “Exterior lamps” on page  
243.  
Exterior lamp switch, see page 84.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Fuel reserve and fuel cap  
Charge indicator lamp ............... 211  
Exterior lamp failure  
indicator lamp ............................. 211  
Roll bar warning lamp ............... 212  
ADS indicator lamp .................... 212  
High beam  
indicator lamp ............................. 213  
Additional function  
indicator lamps  
(in the odometer display) .......... 213  
Instrument cluster display  
placement warning ................... 207  
Electronic stability program  
(ESP)- warning lamp ................. 207  
BAS/ESP malfunction  
indicator lamp ............................ 207  
ABS malfunction  
indicator lamp ............................ 208  
Low engine coolant  
level warning lamp ....................209  
Low windshield and  
headlamp washer  
Malfunction and indicator  
lamps in the  
instrument cluster ....................204  
On-board  
diagnostic system .......................204  
Check engine malfunction  
indicator lamp .............................204  
Brake warning lamp ..................205  
Brake pad wear  
indicator lamp .............................205  
Seat belt warning lamp .............206  
Supplemental  
Malfunction and  
indicator lamp  
(in the dashboard) .................... 213  
Passenger airbag  
indicator lamp ............................. 213  
system fluid level  
warning lamp ..............................210  
Low engine oil level  
warning lamp ..............................210  
restraint system  
(SRS) indicator lamp ..................206  
Contents - Instrument cluster display  
Instruments  
203  
Instrument  
Technical  
Car care  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Index  
and controls  
cluster display  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Malfunction and indicator lamps  
204  
Malfunction and indicator lamps  
in the instrument cluster  
If the “CHECK ENGINE” lamp comes on continuously  
and / or the vehicle is not driving normally, serious  
damage can occur to the emission system. Please  
contact your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center  
immediately.  
General information:  
If a bulb in the instrument cluster fails to light up  
during the bulb self-check when turning the electronic  
key in steering lock to position 2, have it checked and  
replaced if necessary.  
The Sequential Multiport Fuel Injection (SFI) control  
module monitors emission control components that  
either provide input signals to or receive output signals  
from the control module. Malfunctions resulting from  
interruptions or failure of any of these components are  
indicated by the “CHECK ENGINE” malfunction  
indicator lamp in the instrument cluster and are  
simultaneously stored in the SFI control module.  
On-board diagnostic system  
Check engine malfunction indicator lamp  
Engine malfunction indicator lamp. If the  
“CHECK ENGINE” malfunction indicator  
lamp comes on when the engine is running,  
If the “CHECK ENGINE” malfunction indicator lamp  
comes on, have the system checked at your authorized  
Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible.  
it indicates a malfunction of the fuel management  
system, emission control system, systems which impact  
emissions, or the fuel cap is not closed tight (check the  
fuel cap). If the “CHECK ENGINE” lamp is illuminated  
continuously and the vehicle is driving normally, you  
may still drive the vehicle, however, in all cases, we  
recommend that you have the system checked at your  
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible.  
With some exceptions, the control module switches off  
the “CHECK ENGINE” malfunction indicator lamp if the  
condition, causing the lamp to come on, no longer exists  
during three consecutive cycles. See also page 207 for  
fuel cap placement warning.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
An on-board diagnostic connector is located in the  
passenger compartment near the engine hood release,  
allowing the accurate identification of system  
malfunctions through the readout of diagnostic trouble  
codes.  
Warning!  
Driving with the brake warning lamp illuminated  
can result in an accident. Have your brake system  
checked immediately if the brake warning lamp  
stays on. Don’t add brake fluid before checking the  
brake system. Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir  
can result in spilling brake fluid on hot engine  
parts and the brake fluid catching fire. You can be  
seriously burned.  
Brake warning lamp  
Except Canada  
Note:  
Canada only  
If you find that the minimum mark on the brake fluid  
reservoir is reached, have the brake system checked for  
brake pad thickness and leaks.  
With the key in steering lock position 2, the brake  
warning lamp will come on. It should go out when the  
engine is running.  
Brake pad wear indicator lamp  
The brake warning lamp will come on:  
With the key in steering lock position 2, the  
brake pad wear indicator lamp comes on. It  
goes out when the engine is running.  
• when there is insufficient brake fluid in the  
reservoir (engine running and parking brake  
released), or  
If the indicator lamp lights up during braking, this  
indicates that the brake pads are worn down.  
• when the parking brake is set (engine running).  
Have the brake system checked at your authorized  
Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible.  
Malfunction and indicator lamps  
205  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Malfunction and indicator lamps  
Seat belt warning lamp  
206  
Supplemental restraint system (SRS) indicator lamp  
The operational readiness of the airbag  
system is verified by the indicator lamp  
“SRS” in the instrument cluster when  
With the key in steering lock position 2, the  
seat belt warning lamp comes on, and a  
warning sounds for a short time if the  
turning the key in steering lock to position 1 or 2. If no  
fault is detected, the lamp will go out after  
approximately 4 seconds; after the lamp goes out, the  
system continues to monitor the components and  
circuitry of the airbag system and will indicate a  
malfunction by coming on again.  
drivers seat belt is not fastened.  
If a backrest is not engaged in its lock, a warning will  
sound intermittently for up to approx. 20 seconds.  
After starting the engine, the seat belt warning lamp  
blinks for a brief period to remind the driver and  
passengers to fasten seat belts before driving off.  
Warning!  
If the warning lamp does not go out after blinking  
briefly, but is instead lit continuously, then a backrest is  
not engaged in its lock.  
In the event a malfunction of the “SRS” is indicated  
as outlined above, the “SRS” may not be  
operational. For your safety, we strongly  
recommend that you visit an authorized  
Mercedes-Benz Center immediately to have the  
system checked; otherwise the “SRS” may not be  
activated when needed in an accident, which could  
result in serious or fatal injury, or it might deploy  
unexpectedly and unnecessarily which could also  
result in injury.  
The warning lamp goes out as soon as the backrest is  
engaged in its lock.  
If the backrest is locked and the warning lamp does not  
go out, have the system checked at your authorized  
Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible.  
See page 60 for notes on airbags, see page 59 for belt  
tensioners and page 68 for infant and child seat  
restraint.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Fuel reserve and fuel cap placement warning  
Electronic stability program (ESP) — warning lamp  
With the key in steering lock position 2, the  
fuel reserve warning lamp comes on. It  
should go out immediately when the engine  
is running.  
The yellow ESP warning lamp in the  
speedometer dial comes on with the key in  
steering lock position 2. It should go out  
with engine running.  
If the warning lamp does not go out after starting the  
engine, or if it comes on while driving, it indicates that  
the fuel level is down to the reserve quantity of  
approximately 2.6 gal (10 liters).  
See page 192 if the warning lamp lights up or flashes  
when the vehicle is moving.  
BAS/ESP malfunction indicator lamp  
The warning lamp blinks when the fuel cap is not  
closed, or a fuel system leak has been detected.  
Retighten cap and see if warning lamp goes out after  
restart and next OBD selfcheck.  
The malfunction indicator lamp for the ESP  
is combined with that of the BAS.  
The yellow BAS/ESP malfunction indicator  
lamp in the instrument cluster comes on with the key in  
steering lock position 2. It should go out with the engine  
running.  
If the warning lamp continues to blink after closing the  
fuel cap correctly, have the fuel system checked at your  
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible.  
If the BAS/ESP malfunction indicator lamp comes on  
permanently with the engine running, see page 188  
and 192.  
Leaving the engine running and the fuel cap open can  
cause the “CHECK ENGINE” lamp to illuminate (see also  
page 204).  
Malfunction and indicator lamps  
207  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Malfunction and indicator lamps  
ABS malfunction indicator lamp  
208  
If the charging voltage falls below 10 volts, the  
malfunction indicator lamp comes on and the ABS is  
switched off. When the voltage is above this value again,  
the malfunction indicator lamp should go out and the  
ABS is operational.  
The ABS malfunction indicator lamp in the  
instrument cluster comes on with the key in  
steering lock position 2 and should go out  
ABS  
with the engine running.  
Have the system checked at your authorized  
Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible.  
When the ABS malfunction indicator lamp symbol and  
warning in the instrument cluster come on while the  
engine is running, it indicates that the ABS has detected  
a malfunction and has switched off. In this case, the  
brake system functions in the usual manner, but  
without antilock assistance.  
See page 190 for notes on antilock brake system (ABS).  
With the ABS malfunctioning, the BAS and ESP are also  
switched off. Both malfunction indicator lamps come on  
with the engine running.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Low engine coolant level warning lamp  
With the key in steering lock position 2, the  
In cases of major or frequent minor coolant loss, have  
the cooling system checked at your authorized  
Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible.  
warning lamp comes on. It should go out  
when the engine is running.  
Note:  
If the warning lamp does not go out after starting the  
engine, or if it comes on while driving, then the coolant  
level has dropped below the required level. If no leaks  
are noticeable and the engine temperature does not  
increase, continue to drive to the nearest service station  
and have coolant added to the coolant system,  
see page 225.  
Do not drive without coolant in the cooling system. The  
engine will overheat causing major engine damage.  
Monitor the coolant temperature gauge while driving.  
Warning!  
Do not spill antifreeze on hot engine parts.  
Antifreeze contains ethylene glycol which may  
burn if it comes into contact with hot engine parts.  
You can be seriously burned.  
The low engine coolant level warning light should not be  
ignored. Extended driving with the light illuminated  
may cause serious engine damage not covered by the  
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.  
Malfunction and indicator lamps  
209  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Malfunction and indicator lamps  
210  
Low windshield and headlamp washer system fluid  
level warning lamp  
Low engine oil level warning lamp  
With the key in steering lock position 2, the  
oil level warning lamp comes on. It should  
go out immediately when the engine is  
running.  
With the key in steering lock position 2, the  
warning lamp comes on. It should go out  
when the engine is running.  
If the warning lamp does not go out after starting the  
engine, or comes on with the engine running and at  
operating temperature, the engine oil level has dropped  
to approximately the minimum mark on the dipstick.  
If the warning lamp does not go out after starting the  
engine, or if it comes on while driving, the level of the  
reservoir has dropped to approx. 1/3 of the total volume.  
The reservoir should be refilled with MB Windshield  
Washer Concentrate “S” and water (or commercially  
available premixed windshield washer solvent/  
antifreeze, depending on ambient temperature - see  
page 88) at the next opportunity. The reservoir for the  
windshield and headlamp washer systems is located in  
the engine compartment.  
When this occurs, the warning lamp will first come on  
intermittently and then stay on if the oil level drops  
further.  
If no leaks are noted, continue to drive to the nearest  
service station where the engine oil should be topped to  
the “full” mark on the dipstick with an approved oil.  
The low engine oil level warning light should not be  
ignored. Extended driving with the light illuminated  
could result in serious engine damage that is not  
covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.  
In addition to the warning lamp, the engine oil level  
should be periodically checked with the dipstick, for  
example during a fuel stop, or before a long trip,  
see page 222.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Charge indicator lamp  
Should the charge indicator lamp fail to  
Exterior lamp failure indicator lamp  
With the key in steering lock position 2, an  
come on prior to starting when the key is in  
indicator lamp comes on. It should go out  
steering lock position 2 or should it fail to go  
when the engine is running.  
out after starting or during operation, this indicates a  
malfunction which must be repaired immediately at an  
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.  
If the warning lamp does not go out after starting the  
engine, or if it comes on while driving, this lamp  
indicates a failure in the parking lamp, taillamp, stop  
lamp, or low beam headlamp.  
If the charge indicator lamp comes on, or a loss of power  
steering assistance is noticeable while the engine is  
running, this may indicate that one of the two poly-V-  
belts has broken. Should this condition occur, the poly-  
V-belt must be replaced before continuing to operate the  
vehicle. Otherwise, the engine may overheat due to an  
inoperative water pump which may result in damage to  
the engine.  
If an exterior lamp fails, the indicator lamp will come on  
only when that lamp is switched on.  
If a brake lamp fails, the lamp failure indicator will  
come on when applying the brake and stays on until the  
engine is turned off.  
Note:  
Do not continue to drive the vehicle with the charge  
indicator lamp illuminated. Doing so could result in  
serious engine damage that is not covered by the  
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.  
If additional lighting equipment is installed (e.g.  
auxiliary headlamps etc.) be certain to connect into the  
fuse before the failure indicator monitoring unit in  
order to avoid damaging the system.  
Malfunction and indicator lamps  
211  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Malfunction and warning messages  
Roll bar warning lamp  
212  
ADS indicator lamp  
With the key in steering lock position 2, the  
roll bar warning lamp comes on and goes out  
with the engine running.  
If the malfunction indicator stays on after  
the engine is running, then the oil level in  
the reservoir is low or the system has  
detected a malfunction.  
Warning!  
Have the ADS checked at your authorized  
Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible.  
If the warning lamp does not go out after starting  
the engine, or if it comes on while driving, and the  
indicator lamps in the roll bar switch blink  
simultaneously, then the roll bar system is not  
operating properly and may not activate in an  
accident. In this case, raise the roll bar manually  
(see page 118) before continuing to drive.  
For detailed information see page 199  
Have the roll bar system checked at your authorized  
Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
High beam indicator lamp  
High beam indicator lamp, see page 86  
Malfunction and indicator lamp  
(in the dashboard)  
Passenger airbag indicator lamp  
ü Passenger airbag automatically switched off,  
Additional function indicator lamps  
(in the odometer display)  
see page 60.  
FSS indicator (distance, Service A),  
see page 80.  
FSS indicator (distance, Service B),  
see page 80.  
FSS indicator (days, Service A),  
see page 80.  
FSS indicator (days, Service B),  
see page 80.  
Start lock-out malfunction, see page 33.  
Malfunction and warning messages  
213  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Windshield and  
Exterior lamps ................................243  
Headlamp assembly  
Practical hints  
headlamp washer  
First aid kit ..................................... 216  
Stowing things in the vehicle ...... 216  
Vehicle tools .................................... 217  
Vehicle jack ..................................... 218  
Fuses ................................................ 219  
Hood .................................................220  
Automatic transmission  
fluid level ...................................222  
Checking engine oil level .............222  
Coolant level ...................................224  
Adding coolant ...............................225  
fluid mixing ratio ..................... 226  
Wheels ............................................227  
Tire replacement ...........................227  
Rotating wheels .............................228  
Spare wheel ....................................229  
Changing wheels ........................... 231 Raising soft top manually .............254  
Tire inflation pressure ................. 235 Replacing wiper blade .................258  
Battery ............................................. 237 Manual release of  
(Halogen) .....................................244  
Taillamp assemblies ..................250  
Changing batteries in the  
remote control ...........................252  
Synchronizing ............................253  
fuel filler flap .............................260  
Trunk lamp .....................................260  
Battery Recycling .......................238  
Jump starting ................................. 239  
Towing the vehicle ........................ 241  
Contents - Practical hints  
215  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Car care  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
First aid kit  
216  
First aid kit  
Stowing things in the vehicle  
Warning!  
The first aid kit is located in the storage compartment  
behind the seats.  
To help avoid personal injury during a collision or  
sudden maneuver, exercise care when stowing  
things. Put luggage or cargo in the trunk if  
possible.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Vehicle tools  
1 Trunk floor  
2 Strap  
3 Structured spare wheel  
4 Wing nut and washer  
5 Jack arm  
6 Jack base  
7 Tool kit  
Roll back the floor mat, lift the trunk floor (1) and  
engage strap (2) in the hooks on the upper edge of the  
trunk lid.  
First remove the vehicle jack, then the spare wheel;  
reinstall in reverse order.  
Vehicle tools  
217  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Vehicle jack  
218  
Vehicle jack  
Warning!  
See illustration for proper storage of jack, page 217.  
The jack is designed exclusively for jacking up the  
vehicle at the jack tubes built into either side of the  
vehicle. To help avoid personal injury, use the jack  
only to lift the vehicle during a wheel change.  
Never get beneath the vehicle while it is supported  
by the jack. Keep hands and feet away from the area  
under the lifted vehicle. Always firmly set parking  
brake and block wheels before raising vehicle with  
jack.  
Before storing the jack, the jack arm (5) must be lowered  
almost to the base (6) of the jack.  
Note:  
First remove the vehicle jack, then the spare wheel;  
reinstall in reverse order.  
Do not disengage parking brake while the vehicle is  
raised. Be certain that the jack is always vertical  
when in use, especially on hills. Always try to use  
the jack on level surface. Be sure that the jack arm  
is fully inserted in the jack tube. Always lower the  
vehicle onto sufficient capacity jackstands before  
working under the vehicle.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Fuses  
1 Main fuse box in engine compartment  
Spare fuses are supplied inside the fuse box. Observe  
amperage and color of fuse.  
2 Auxiliary fuse box in trunk on rear wall  
Always use a new fuse for replacement. Never attempt to  
repair or bridge a blown fuse.  
Before replacing a blown fuse, determine the cause of  
the short circuit.  
A fuse chart can be found inside the corresponding fuse  
box cover.  
After replacing a blown fuse, close fuse box cover.  
Fuses  
219  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Engine compartment  
Hood  
220  
3
3
2
P68.00-0514-26  
P88.40-0312-26  
To open:  
Pull handle (2) to its stop out of radiator grill, and open  
hood (do not pull up on handle).  
To unlock the hood, pull release lever under the driver’s  
side of the instrument panel.  
Note:  
Pull handle (2) up and open hood.  
Do not lift hood at louvers of grill! Make certain the  
windshield wiper arm is not folded forward.  
Caution!  
To avoid damage to the windshield wipers or hood, open  
the hood only with wipers in the parked position.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
To close:  
The engine is equipped with a transistorized  
ignition system. Because of the high voltage it is  
dangerous to touch any components (ignition coils,  
spark plug sockets, diagnostic socket) of the  
ignition system  
Lower hood and let it drop into lock from a height of  
approx. 1 ft. (30 cm), assisting with hands placed flat on  
edges of hood (3).  
To avoid hood damage, please make sure that hood is  
fully closed. If not, repeat closing procedure. Do not  
push down on hood to attempt to fully close it.  
• with the engine running,  
• while starting the engine,  
• if ignition is “on” and the engine is turned  
manually.  
Warning!  
To help prevent personal injury, stay clear of  
moving parts when the hood is open and the engine  
is running. Be sure the hood is properly closed  
before driving. When closing hood, use extreme  
caution not to catch hands or fingers.  
If you see flames, steam or smoke coming from the  
engine compartment, or if the coolant temperature  
gauge indicates that the engine is overheated, do  
not open the hood. Move away from vehicle and do  
not open the hood until the engine has cooled. If  
necessary, call a fire department.  
The radiator fan may continue to run another  
approximate 30 seconds or even restart after the  
engine has been turned off. Stay clear from fan  
blades.  
Engine compartment  
221  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Checking engine oil level  
Automatic transmission fluid level  
222  
Checking engine oil level  
The transmission has a permanent fill of automatic  
transmission fluid.  
Regular automatic transmission fluid level checks and  
changes are not required. For this reason the dipstick is  
omitted.  
If you notice fluid loss or gear shifting malfunctions,  
have your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center check the  
transmission fluid level.  
SL 500  
1 Oil dipstick  
2 Oil filler cap  
To check the engine oil level, park vehicle on level  
ground, with engine at normal operational temperature.  
Check engine oil level approximately 5 minutes after  
stopping the engine, allowing for the oil to return to the  
oil pan.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Oil level must be between the lower  
(min) and upper (max) mark of the  
dipstick.  
M E R C E D E S B E N Z  
M E R C E D E S B E N Z  
2
Fill quantity between upper and lower dipstick marking  
level is approximately 2.1 US qt (2.0l).  
Do not overfill the engine.  
1
Excessive oil must be drained or siphoned. It could  
cause engine damage not covered by the Mercedes-Benz  
Limited Warranty.  
P18.40-0258-26  
For low engine oil level warning, see page 210.  
SL 600  
1 Oil dipstick  
2 Oil filler cap  
Wipe oil dipstick clean prior to checking the engine oil  
level. Fully insert dipstick in tube, and remove after  
three seconds to obtain accurate reading.  
Checking engine oil level  
223  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Coolant level  
224  
Coolant level  
The coolant level can be checked visually at the  
transparent coolant reservoir.  
To check the coolant level, the vehicle must be parked  
on level ground.  
Check coolant level only when coolant is cold:  
The coolant should reach the rib in the filler neck. Also  
see marking (arrow) on reservoir.  
1 Cap for coolant reservoir  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Adding coolant  
Warning!  
If coolant has to be added, a 50/50 mixture of water and  
MB anticorrosion/antifreeze should be added.  
In order to avoid possible serious burns or injury:  
• Use extreme caution when opening the hood if  
there are any signs of steam or coolant leaking  
from the cooling system, or if the coolant  
temperature gauge indicates that the engine is  
overheated.  
Model SL 500  
The drain plugs for the cooling system are located on  
the right side of the engine block and at the bottom of  
the radiator.  
• Do not remove pressure cap on coolant  
reservoir if engine temperature is above 194°F  
(90°C). Allow engine to cool down before  
removing cap. The coolant reservoir contains  
hot fluid and is under pressure.  
Model SL 600  
The drain plugs for the cooling system are located on  
the right and left sides of the engine block and at the  
bottom of the radiator.  
• Using a rag, slowly open cap approximately 1/2  
turn to relieve excess pressure. If opened  
immediately, scalding hot fluid and steam will  
be blown out under pressure.  
Anticorrosion/antifreeze, see coolants on page 281.  
• Do not spill antifreeze on hot engine parts.  
Antifreeze contains ethylene glycol which may  
burn if it comes into contact with hot engine  
parts.  
Coolant level  
225  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Windshield and headlamp washer fluid mixing ratio  
Windshield and headlamp washer fluid mixing ratio  
226  
The reservoir should be refilled with MB Windshield  
Washer Concentrate and water (or concentrate  
commercially available premixed windshield washer  
solvent/antifreeze, depending on ambient  
temperatures).  
For temperatures above freezing:  
1
MB Windshield Washer Concentrate “S” and water.  
1 part “S” to 100 parts water  
(40 ml “S” to 1 gallon water)  
For temperature below freezing:  
MB Windshield Washer Concentrate “S” and  
commercially available premixed windshield washer  
solvent/antifreeze.  
P82.35-0231-26  
1 Windshield washer/headlamp cleaning system  
1 part “S” to 100 parts solvent  
(40 ml “S” to 1 gallon solvent).  
fluid reservoir  
Vehicles without ADS:  
Capacity approx. 5.3 US qt (5.0 l)  
Vehicles with ADS:  
Capacity approx. 3.2 US qt (3.0 l)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Wheels  
Tire replacement  
Replace rims or tires with the same designation,  
manufacturer and type as shown on the original part.  
See your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for further  
information.  
Front and rear tires should be replaced in sets.  
Furthermore - in the event of tire replacement - the  
spare wheel (except Sport Package version), if possible,  
should be used on the rear axle. Rims and tires must be  
of the correct size and type. For dimensions, see  
page 274.  
See your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for  
information on tested and recommended rims and tires  
for summer and winter operation. They can also offer  
advice concerning tire service and purchase.  
We recommend that you break in new tires for approx.  
60 miles (100 km) at moderate speed.  
It is imperative that the wheel mounting bolts be  
fastened to a tightening torque of 80 ft.lb. (110 Nm)  
whenever wheels are mounted.  
For rim and tire specifications, see page 274.  
Tires, Wheels  
227  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Tires, Wheels  
228  
Rotating wheels  
Warning!  
When replacing a tire on the 9 1/2 J x 18 H2 (Sport  
Package SL 500) or 10 J x 18 H2 (Sport Package  
SL 600) wheel rim, removal or mounting must only  
be done over the back flange. Removal or  
installation over the front flange will cause rim/  
tire failure leading to serious or fatal injury.  
Wheel rotation applies only when winter tires are  
mounted on all four wheels.  
The wheels can be rotated according to the degree of  
tire wear while retaining the same direction of travel.  
Rotating, however, should be carried out as  
recommended by the tire manufacturer, before the  
characteristic tire wear pattern (shoulder wear on front  
wheels and tread center wear on rear wheels) becomes  
visible, as otherwise the driving properties deteriorate.  
Worn, old tires can cause accidents. If the tire tread  
is badly worn, or if the tires have sustained  
damage, replace them.  
When replacing rims, use only genuine Mercedes-  
Benz wheel bolts specified for the particular rim  
type. Failure to do so can result in the bolts  
loosening and possibly an accident.  
Important!  
Unidirectional tires must always be mounted with arrow  
on tire sidewall pointing in direction of vehicle forward  
movement.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Notes:  
Spare wheel  
(except Sport Package)  
Thoroughly clean the inner side of the wheels any time  
you rotate the wheels or wash the vehicle underside.  
The spare wheel rim size is 8 1/4 J x 17 H2.  
The use of retread tires is not recommended. Retread  
tires may adversely affect the handling characteristics  
and safety of the vehicle.  
In the case of a flat tire, or breakdown, you may  
temporarily use the spare wheel.  
Unidirectional tires must always be mounted with arrow  
on tire sidewall pointing in direction of vehicle forward  
movement.  
Dented or bent rims can cause tire pressure loss and  
damage to the tire beads. For this reason, check rims for  
damage at regular intervals. The rim flanges must be  
checked for wear before a tire is mounted. Remove  
burrs, if any.  
If the arrow on tire sidewall does not point in direction  
of vehicle forward movement when using the spare  
wheel, observe the following restrictions:  
Check and ensure proper tire inflation pressure after  
rotating the wheels. For tire inflation pressure see  
page 235.  
• Drive to the nearest repair facility to have the flat  
tire repaired or replaced as appropriate.  
• Do not operate vehicle with more than one spare  
wheel mounted.  
For additional information, refer to page 274.  
Warning!  
The spare wheel rim is for temporary use only. Use  
for over a total of 12 000 miles (20 000 km)  
(aggregate of all uses) may cause wheel rim failure  
leading to an accident and possible injuries.  
Tires, Wheels  
229  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Tires, Wheels  
230  
Spare Wheel  
(with Sport Package)  
Warning!  
The spare wheel rim is for temporary use only. Use  
for over a total of 12 000 miles (20 000 km) may  
cause wheel rim failure leading to an accident and  
possible injuries.  
The spare wheel rim size is 8 1/4 J x 17 H2 with tire size  
245/45 R 17 95W.  
In the case of a flat tire or breakdown, you may  
temporarily use the spare wheel.  
The dimensions of the spare wheel are different  
from those of road wheels. As a result, the vehicle  
handling characteristics change when driving with  
a mounted spare wheel.  
Unidirectional tires must always be mounted with arrow  
on tire sidewall pointing in direction of vehicle forward  
movement. If the arrow on tire sidewall does not point  
in direction of vehicle forward movement when using  
the spare wheel, observe the following restrictions:  
The spare wheel should only be used temporarily,  
and replaced with a regular road wheel as quickly  
as possible.  
• Do not exceed vehicle speed of 50 mph (80 km/h).  
• Drive to the nearest repair facility to have the flat  
tire repaired or replaced as appropriate.  
• Do not operate vehicle with more than one spare  
wheel mounted.  
For additional information, refer to page 274.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Changing wheels  
Move vehicle to a level area which is a safe distance  
from the roadway.  
The jack is designed exclusively for jacking up the  
vehicle at the jack tubes built into either side of the  
vehicle. To help avoid personal injury, use the jack  
only to lift the vehicle during a wheel change.  
Never get beneath the vehicle while it is supported  
by the jack. Keep hands and feet away from the area  
under the lifted vehicle. Always firmly set parking  
brake and block wheels before raising vehicle with  
jack.  
1. Firmly set parking brake, raise roll bar, and turn on  
hazard warning flasher.  
2. Move selector lever to position “P”.  
3. While engine is running, depress wheel change  
switch for level control. The indicator lamp in the  
switch and the ADS malfunction indicator lamp light  
up.  
Do not disengage parking brake while the vehicle is  
raised. Be certain that the jack is always vertical  
when in use, especially on hills. Always try to use  
the jack on level surface. Be sure that the jack arm  
is fully inserted in the jack tube. Always lower the  
vehicle onto sufficient capacity jackstands before  
working under the vehicle.  
4. Turn off engine.  
5. Prevent vehicle from rolling away by blocking  
wheels with wheel chocks (not supplied with  
vehicle) or sizable wood block or stone. When  
changing a wheel on a hill, place chocks on the  
downhill side blocking both wheels of the other  
axle. On a level road, place one chock in front of and  
one behind the wheel that is diagonally opposite to  
the wheel being changed.  
Before working on the vehicle, e.g. when changing  
wheels, the roll bar should be raised with the  
switch, and the key be removed from the steering  
lock, to prevent possible injury.  
Tires, Wheels  
231  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Tires, Wheels  
232  
P40.10-0375-26  
6. Using the wrench, loosen but do not yet remove the  
wheel bolts.  
7. Remove the protective cover from the jack support  
tube opening by inserting the screwdriver in the  
opening and prying it out.  
The tube openings are located directly behind the  
front wheel housings and in front of the rear wheel  
housings.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8. Insert jack arm fully into the tube hole up to the  
stop. Place jack on firm ground. Position the jack so  
that it is always vertical (plumb-line) as seen from  
the side (see arrow), especially if the vehicle is  
parked on an incline.  
11. Remove wheel. Grip wheel from the sides. Keep  
hands from beneath the wheels.  
12. Clean contact surfaces of wheel and wheel hub.  
Install spare wheel on wheel hub. Insert wheel bolts  
and tighten them slightly.  
9. Jack up the vehicle until the wheel is clear of the  
ground. Never start engine while vehicle is raised.  
To avoid paint damage, place wheel flat against hub  
and hold it there while installing first wheel bolt.  
10. Unscrew upper-most wheel bolt and install  
alignment bolt (1) supplied in the tool kit. Remove  
the remaining bolts. Keep bolt threads protected  
from dirt and sand.  
Unscrew the alignment bolt (1) to install the last  
wheel bolt.  
Tires, Wheels  
233  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Tires, Wheels  
234  
13. Lower vehicle. Remove jack and insert jack tube  
cover.  
Before storing the jack, the jack arm must be  
lowered almost to the base of the jack.  
Store the spare wheel first and then the vehicle jack.  
Warning!  
Always replace wheel bolts that are damaged or  
rusted.  
Never apply oil or grease to wheel bolts.  
Damaged wheel hub threads should be repaired  
immediately.  
14. Using the wrench, tighten the five bolts evenly,  
following the sequence illustrated, until all bolts are  
tight.  
Incorrect mounting bolts or improperly tightened  
mounting bolts can cause the wheel to come off.  
This could cause an accident. Be sure to use the  
correct mounting bolts.  
Observe a tightening torque of 80 ft.lb. (110 Nm).  
15. Ensure proper tire pressure.  
16. Depress wheel change switch for level control. The  
indicator lamp in the switch and the ADS  
malfunction indicator lamp will go out.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Tire inflation pressure  
Warning!  
A table (see fuel filler flap) lists the tire inflation  
pressures specified for Mercedes-Benz recommended  
tires as well as for the varying operating conditions.  
Do not drive the vehicle while the wheel change  
switch is activated since the vehicle suspension  
will not function properly.  
Important!  
Warning!  
Tire pressure changes by approx. 1.5 psi (0.1 bar) per  
18°F (10°C) of air temperature change. Keep this in  
mind when checking tire pressure inside a garage -  
especially in the winter.  
The spare wheel rim is for temporary use only. Use  
for over a total of 12 000 miles (20 000 km) may  
cause wheel rim failure leading to an accident and  
possible injuries.  
Example:  
Vehicles with Sport Package:  
If garage temperature = approx. +68°F (+20°C) and  
ambient temperature = approx. +32°F (0°C) then the  
adjusted air pressure = specified air pressure +3psi  
(+0.2 bar).  
The dimensions of the spare wheel are different  
from those of road wheels. As a result, the vehicle  
handling characteristics change when driving with  
a mounted spare wheel.  
The spare wheel should only be used temporarily,  
and replaced with a regular road wheel as quickly  
as possible.  
Tire pressures listed for light loads are minimum values  
offering high driving comfort. Increased inflation  
pressures for heavy loads produce favorable handling  
characteristics with lighter loads and are perfectly  
permissible. The ride of the vehicle, however, will  
become somewhat harder.  
Tire temperature and pressure increase with the vehicle  
speed. Tire pressure should therefore only be checked  
and corrected on cold tires. Correct tire pressure in  
Tires, Wheels  
235  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Tires, Wheels  
236  
warm tires only if pressure has dropped below the  
pressure listed in the table and the respective operating  
conditions are taken into consideration.  
Warning!  
Do not overinflate tires. Overinflating tires can  
result in sudden deflation (blowout) because they  
are more likely to become punctured or damaged  
by road debris, potholes etc. Follow recommended  
inflation pressures.  
An underinflated tire due to a slow leak (e.g. due to a  
nail in the tire) may cause damage such as tread  
separation, bulging etc. Regular tire pressure checks at  
intervals of no more than 14 days are therefore  
essential.  
Do not overload the tires by exceeding the specified  
vehicle capacity weight (as indicated by the label  
on the driver’s door latch post). Overloading the  
tires can overheat them, possibly causing a  
blowout.  
If a tire constantly loses air, it should be inspected for  
damage.  
The spare tire should be checked periodically for  
condition and inflation. Spare tire will age and become  
worn over time even if never used, and thus should be  
inspected and replaced when necessary.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Battery  
Therefore, we strongly recommend that you have the  
battery charge checked frequently, and corrected if  
necessary, especially if you use the vehicle less than  
approximately 200 miles (300 km) per month,  
mostly for short distance trips, or if it is not used for  
long periods of time.  
Warning!  
Failure to follow these instructions can result in  
severe injury or death.  
Never lean over batteries while connecting, you  
might get injured.  
Only charge a battery with a battery charger after the  
battery has been disconnected from the vehicle’s  
electrical circuit.  
Battery fluid contains sulfuric acid. Do not allow  
this fluid to come in contact with eyes, skin or  
clothing. In case it does, immediately flush affected  
area with water and seek medical help.  
Always disconnect the battery negative lead first and  
connect last.  
When removing and connecting the battery, always  
make sure that all electrical consumers are off and the  
key is in steering lock position 0. The battery must  
always be securely installed when the vehicle is in  
operation. During removal and installation always  
protect the disconnected battery positive (+) terminal  
with the cover attached to the battery.  
A battery will also produce hydrogen gas, which is  
flammable and explosive. Keep flames or sparks  
away from battery, avoid improper connection of  
jumper cables, smoking etc.  
Important!  
Battery replacement information:  
While the engine is running the battery terminal clamps  
must not be loosened or detached, otherwise the  
generator and other electronic components will be  
damaged.  
The maintenance-free battery is located in the trunk  
behind the right side cover panel.  
The service life of the battery is dependent on its  
condition of charge. The battery should always be kept  
sufficiently charged, in order to last an optimum length  
of time.  
Battery  
237  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Battery  
238  
Important!  
Battery Recycling  
Do not close a door with the windows fully closed while  
the power supply is interrupted (battery disconnected or  
empty).  
Batteries contain materials that can harm the  
environment with improper disposal.  
Large 12 Volt storage batteries contain lead.  
Doing so could damage the window frame.  
Note:  
Recycling of batteries is the preferred method of  
disposal.  
After reconnecting the battery also set the clock,  
resynchronize the express feature of the power  
windows, the electronic stability program (ESP) and the  
adaptive damping System (ADS).  
Many states require sellers of batteries to accept old  
batteries for recycling.  
See page 79 for setting clock, page 41 for power  
windows, page 193 for ESP and page 199 for ADS.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Jump starting  
Warning!  
Important!  
A discharged battery can freeze at approx. +14°F  
(–10°C). In that case, it must be thawed out before  
jumper cables are used. Attempting to jump start a  
frozen battery can result in it exploding, causing  
personal injury.  
Failure to follow these directions will cause  
damage to the electronic components, and can lead  
to a battery explosion and severe injury or death.  
Never lean over batteries while connecting or jump  
starting, you might get injured.  
Jumper cable specifications:  
• Minimum cable cross-section of 25 mm2 or approx.  
2 AWG  
Battery fluid contains sulfuric acid. Do not allow  
this fluid to come in contact with eyes, skin or  
clothing. In case it does, immediately flush affected  
area with water, and seek medical help if  
necessary.  
• Maximum length of 11.5 ft. (3.5 m).  
If the battery is discharged, the engine should be started  
with jumper cables and the (12 V) battery of another  
vehicle.  
A battery will also produce hydrogen gas, which is  
flammable and very explosive. Keep flames or  
sparks away from battery, avoid improper  
connection of jumper cables, smoking etc.  
Only use 12 V battery to jump start your vehicle. Jump  
starting with more powerful battery could damage the  
vehicle’s electrical systems, which will not be covered  
by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.  
Read all instructions before proceeding.  
The battery is located in the trunk behind the right side  
cover panel.  
Jump starting  
239  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Jump starting  
240  
Proceed as follows:  
Important!  
1. Position the vehicle with the charged battery so that  
the jumper cables will reach, but never let the  
vehicles touch. Make sure the jumper cables do not  
have loose or missing unsulation.  
5. Start engine of the vehicle with the charged battery  
and run at high idle. Make sure the cables are not  
on or near pulleys, fans, or other parts that will  
move when the engine is started. Allow the  
discharged battery to charge for a few minutes. Start  
engine of the disabled vehicle in the usual manner.  
2. On both vehicles:  
• Turn off engine and all lights and accessories,  
except hazard warning flashers or work lights.  
6. After the engine has started, remove jumper cables  
by exactly reversing the above installation  
sequence, starting with the last connection made  
first. When removing each clamp, make sure that it  
does not touch any other metal while the other end  
is still attached.  
• Apply parking brake and shift selector lever to  
position “P”.  
Important!  
3. Clamp one end of the first jumper cable to the  
positive (+) terminal of the discharged battery and  
the other end to the positive (+) terminal of the  
charged battery. Make sure the cable clamps do not  
touch any other metal parts.  
Note:  
If engine does not run after several unsuccessful  
starting attempts, have it checked at the nearest  
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.  
Excessive unburned fuel may damage the catalytic  
converter.  
4. Clamp one end of the second jumper cable to the  
grounded negative (-) terminal of the charged  
battery and the final connection to the negative (-)  
terminal of the discharged battery.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Towing the vehicle  
P88.20-0315-26  
P31.10-0300-26  
All except Sport Package  
Sport Package  
The rear towing eye is located at the right, below the  
bumper. The front towing eye is located on the  
passenger side behind a flap in the bumper panel.  
Cover installation for all except Sport Package version:  
Engage cover at bottom and press in top securely.  
Cover installation for Sport Package version: Engage  
right cover end, and press in left cover end securely.  
Cover removal for all except Sport Package version:  
Insert finger in recess of flap and pull flap out.  
We recommend that the vehicle be transported using  
flat bed equipment. This method is preferable to other  
types of towing.  
Cover removal for Sport Package version: Pull cover  
away from bumper.  
Towing the vehicle  
241  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Towing the vehicle  
242  
The vehicle may be towed with all wheels on the ground  
and the selector lever in position “N” for distances up to  
30 miles (50 km) and at a speed not to exceed 30 mph  
(50 km/h). The key must be in steering lock position 2.  
When transporting vehicle on flat bed equipment, the  
front end of the vehicle must be loaded first. Additional  
ramping may be required for loading to protect bumper  
fascia.  
To be certain to avoid a possibility of damage to the  
transmission, however, we recommend the drive shaft  
be disconnected at the rear axle drive flange for any  
towing beyond a short tow to a nearby garage.  
Warning!  
With the engine not running, there is no power  
assistance for the braking and steering systems. In  
this case, it is important to keep in mind that a  
considerably higher degree of effort in necessary to  
brake and steer the vehicle.  
Do not tow with sling-type equipment. Towing with  
sling-type equipment over bumpy roads will damage  
radiator and supports.  
The use of wheel lift equipment will damage engine oil  
pan.  
Note:  
To signal turns while being towed with hazard warning  
flasher in use, turn key in steering lock to position 2 and  
activate combination switch for left or right turn signal  
in usual manner – only the selected turn signal will  
operate.  
Important!  
When towing the vehicle, please, note the following:  
With the automatic central locking activated and the  
key in steering lock position 2, the vehicle doors lock if  
the left front wheel as well as the right rear wheel are  
turning at vehicle speeds of approx. 9 mph (15 km/h) or  
more.  
Upon canceling the turn signal, the hazard warning  
flasher will operate again.  
To prevent the vehicle door locks from locking,  
deactivate the automatic central locking.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Exterior lamps  
Replacing bulbs  
Warning!  
Because of high voltage in Xenon lamps, it is  
dangerous to replace the bulb or repair the lamp  
and its components. We recommend that you have  
such work done by a qualified technician.  
To prevent a possible electrical short circuit, switch off  
lamp prior to replacing a bulb.  
When replacing bulbs, install only 12 volt bulbs with  
the specified watt rating.  
When replacing halogen bulbs do not touch glass  
portion of bulb with bare hands. Use plain paper or a  
clean cloth.  
Warning!  
Bulbs and bulb holders can be very hot. Allow the  
lamp to cool down before changing a bulb.  
Halogen lamps contain pressurized gas. A bulb can  
explode if you:  
• touch or move it when hot,  
• drop the bulb,  
• scratch the bulb.  
Wear eye and hand protection.  
Exterior lamps  
243  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Exterior lamps  
244  
Headlamp assembly (Halogen)  
1 Headlamp horizontal adjustment screw  
2 Headlamp vertical adjustment screw  
3 High and low beam headlamp cover  
5 Turn signal, parking, side marker and standing  
lamp bulb  
6 Electrical connector for high and low beam  
headlamp bulb  
4 Squeeze latches for high and low beam headlamp  
7 Clamping ring for high and low beam headlamp  
cover  
bulb  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Bulb for high and low beam (Halogen type 9004)  
Turn signal, parking, side marker and standing  
lamp (2357 NA (28.5/8.3 W/30/2.2 cp) (bulb)  
Squeeze latches (4) and remove cover (3) upwards. Pull  
off electrical connector (6). Turn clamping ring (7)  
counterclockwise and pull out bulb together with  
clamping ring. Remove bulb.  
Open hood.  
Turn bulb socket (5) with bulb counterclockwise and  
pull out. Push bulb into socket, turn counterclockwise  
and remove.  
Insert new bulb (flat side facing up), mount clamping  
ring (7) (with tab facing down) and turn clockwise. Push  
electrical connector on securely.  
Insert new bulb in socket, push in and twist clockwise.  
Reinstall bulb socket, push in and twist clockwise.  
Exterior lamps  
245  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Exterior lamps  
246  
Headlamp assembly (Xenon)  
1 Headlamp horizontal adjustment screw  
2 Headlamp vertical adjustment screw  
3 Adjuster for horizontal adjustment scale  
4 Cover for low beam headlamp  
5 Latch for cover (4)  
6 Cover for high beam headlamp  
7 Latch for cover (6)  
Warning!  
Because of high voltage in Xenon lamps, it is  
dangerous to replace the bulb or repair the lamp  
and its components. We recommend that you have  
such work done by a qualified technician.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8 Turn signal, parking, side marker and standing  
lamp bulb  
9 Electrical connector for high beam headlamp bulb  
10 Electrical connector for low beam headlamp bulb  
Exterior lamps  
247  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Exterior lamps  
248  
Adjusting headlamp aim  
1. Park vehicle on level surface approximately 25 ft.  
(7.6 m) from a vertical test screen or wall. The  
centerline of the vehicle must be at a 90° angle to  
the test screen.  
2. (Low beams on):  
Using a carpenter’s level, align and mark a vertical  
centerline (8) on the test screen using the vertex of  
the angle formed in each beam image. As a check,  
the distance between centerlines should be  
49 5/8 inches (1260 mm). If the distance does not  
check, have the system verified by an authorized  
Mercedes-Benz Center.  
3. Open hood.  
4. Vertical headlamp aim (Low beams on):  
Turn adjusting screw (2) (counterclockwise to adjust  
headlamp downward, clockwise upward) until  
bubble in the level (6) is centered on the “0” mark.  
Graduations: 0.18° pitch.  
Correct headlamp adjustment is extremely important.  
To check and readjust a headlamp, follow steps 1  
through 7. Please note:  
• Adjustments to low beam simultaneously aim the  
high beam.  
• Vehicle should have a normal trunk load.  
• Vertical aim adjustments change horizontal aim.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5. Horizontal headlamp aim (Low beams on):  
Turn adjusting screw (1) (Right front headlamp:  
counterclockwise to adjust to the left, clockwise to  
the right; left front headlamp: counterclockwise to  
adjust to the right, clockwise to the left.) until the  
headlamps (low beam) illuminate the test screen as  
shown. The vertex of the angle formed in each beam  
image should align with the vertical centerline (8) of  
each lamp. The left and right headlamps must be  
adjusted individually.  
6. This indicator (7) in the sight glass should align  
with the “0” mark after any horizontal adjustment.  
If it does not, depress latch (5) and remove access  
cover (4) from the headlamp (left side only). Insert  
and turn screwdriver on adjuster (3) until scale (7)  
is centered on the “0” mark.  
Graduations: 0.38° pitch.  
7. Reinstall access cover (4).  
Note:  
If it is not possible to obtain a proper headlamp  
adjustment, have the system checked at your authorized  
Mercedes-Benz Center.  
Exterior lamps  
249  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Exterior lamps  
250  
Taillamp assemblies  
1 Side marker lamp  
(10 W/6 cp bulb)  
2 Turn signal lamp  
(21 W/32 cp bulb)  
3 Tail, parking and standing lamp  
(21/4 W/32/2 cp bulb)  
Driver’s side:  
Tail, parking, standing and rear fog lamp  
(21/4 W/32/2cp bulb)  
4 Backup lamp  
(21 W/32 cp bulb)  
5 Stop lamp  
(21 W/32 cp bulb)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1
1
1
P82.10-0711-26  
P82.10-0712-26  
To replace bulbs:  
License plate lamps (5 W/4cp bulb)  
Push the locking button (1) on the rear of the lamp  
support inward and swing open lamp support. Push  
down the bulb to be changed, turn counterclockwise and  
remove.  
Loosen both securing screws (1), remove lamp and take  
out bulb.  
Insert new bulb in socket, push in and twist clockwise.  
Close lamp support.  
Exterior lamps  
251  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Remote control  
252  
Changing batteries in the remote control  
Checking batteries  
Changing batteries  
If the transmit button Œ or is pressed longer  
than 1 second, the battery check lamp in the transmitter  
eye (1) lights up briefly – indicating that the batteries  
are in order.  
Unfold master key from holder by pressing key release  
button (2). Pull off battery cover (3).  
Change batteries if the battery check lamp does not light  
up briefly.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Important!  
Batteries contain materials that can harm the  
environment if disposed of improperly. Recycling of  
batteries is the preferred method of disposal. For  
disposal, please follow manufacturer’s recommendation  
on battery package.  
Replacement Battery:  
Lithium, type CR 2025 or equivalent.  
Synchronizing remote control  
The system may have to be resynchronized, if the  
transmitter is without voltage for several minutes.  
Change batteries, inserting new ones with plus (+) side  
facing up.  
To synchronize system, aim transmitter eye at vehicle  
and briefly press transmit button Œ or twice.  
Within approx. 30 seconds insert key in steering lock  
and turn it to position 2.  
Press battery cover onto housing until locked in place.  
The remote control should once again be operational.  
Remote control  
253  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Raising soft top manually  
Raising soft top manually  
254  
1
In case of malfunction, the power soft top can also be  
raised manually. This procedure should be performed  
with great care by 2 persons.  
A combination open-end/Allenhead wrench in the  
vehicle tool kit is required for this job.  
1. Open doors or lower windows.  
2. Lower roll bar with roll bar switch. If the roll bar  
cannot be lowered, the soft top can be carefully  
guided over the roll bar.  
P77.30-0332-26  
3. For safety reasons, remove key from steering lock.  
4. Unlock soft top storage compartment lock, located  
on vehicle right side:  
Warning!  
Place open-end wrench on bolt between roll bar and  
storage compartment cover. Turn wrench (1)  
towards rear of vehicle.  
Do not place your hands near the roll bar, soft top  
frame, upper windshield area or soft top storage  
compartment while the soft top is being locked.  
Serious personal injury may occur.  
Open storage compartment cover and place in  
upright position (2).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2
3
4
P77.30-0333-26  
5. Pull soft top (3) out of compartment and place it in  
its vertical position.  
7. Place soft top frame (5) onto windshield header.  
8. Place soft top bow (4) in its vertical position.  
6. Pull soft top bow (4) out of compartment.  
Raising soft top manually  
255  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Raising soft top manually  
256  
5
P77.30-0336-26  
9. Pivot sun visors to side. Remove left and right  
caps (6).  
10. Using Allenhead wrench, lock left and right of soft  
top frame (5) to windshield header - turn wrench in  
3 stages towards center of vehicle:  
1. Left lock to first notch.  
2. Right lock to second notch.  
3. Left lock to second notch.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
11. Close storage compartment cover (2). - Lock storage  
compartment lock on right side: Place open-end  
wrench on bolt between roll bar and storage  
compartment cover. Turn wrench (1) towards front  
of vehicle.  
12. Lower soft top bow (4). The rear section of the soft  
top cannot be locked during manual operation.  
Raising soft top manually  
257  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Replacing wiper blade  
Replacing wiper blade insert  
258  
Notes:  
Do not open engine hood with wiper arm folded forward.  
1
Do not allow the wiper arm to contact the windshield  
glass without a wiper blade inserted. The glass may be  
scratched or broken.  
Make certain that the wiper blade is properly installed.  
An improperly installed wiper blade may cause  
windshield damage.  
2
3
P82.30-0333-26  
Windshield wiper blade  
Removal:  
Fold wiper arm forward. Press safety tab down (1), push  
wiper blade downward (2) and remove.  
Installation:  
Press down safety tab of new wiper blade. Insert wiper  
blade between the tabs (3) on the wiper arm. Then press  
safety tab upward until it locks in place.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Headlamp wiper blades  
(Halogen lamps)  
Headlamp wiper blades  
(Xenon lamps)  
2
3
1
2
1
P82.30-0344-26  
P82.30-0334-26  
Removal:  
Removal:  
Fold wiper arm forward. Pull out pin (1) and remove  
wiper blade (2).  
Fold wiper arm forward. Rotate wiper blade (2) in  
direction of arrow (1) until it releases from the wiper  
arm.  
Installation:  
Installation:  
Insert wiper blade and install pin.  
Insert wiper blade (2) onto arm, perpendicular to arm,  
and rotate in direction of arrow (3) until it engages.  
Replacing wiper blade  
259  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Manual release of fuel filler flap  
Manual release of fuel filler flap  
260  
Trunk lamp  
1 Switching off  
The manual release knob is located behind cover (2) in  
the right slide trunk panel.  
2 Switching on  
In case the central locking system does not release the  
fuel filler flap:  
Switch off trunk lamp if the trunk is to remain open for  
a long period of time. This prevents the vehicle battery  
from being discharged.  
1. Unscrew wing nut (1)  
When the trunk lid is closed, the switch will reset and  
turn on the lamp the next time the lid is opened.  
2. Pull panel (2) away from trunk wall.  
3. Pull the manual release knob (3) (arrow) while  
simultaneously opening the fuel filler flap.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Ornamental moldings ...............264  
Headlamps, taillamps,  
Soft top .........................................266  
Headliner .....................................267  
Wind screen ................................267  
Automatic antenna .....................267  
Wiper blade .................................267  
Headlamp cleaning  
system ..........................................267  
Leather upholstery .....................268  
Plastic and rubber parts ............268  
Illuminated door sill panels .....268  
Vehicle care  
Cleaning and care  
turn signal lenses ......................264  
Window cleaning .......................265  
Light alloy wheels ..................... 265  
Instrument cluster ..................... 265  
Steering wheel and  
gear selector lever ..................... 265  
Cup holder ..................................265  
Seat belts .....................................266  
of the vehicle .............................262  
Power washer ..............................263  
Tar stains .....................................263  
Paintwork, Painted Body  
Components ................................263  
Engine cleaning ..........................264  
Vehicle washing .........................264  
Headliner, shelf behind  
roll bars, and other hard  
plastic trim items .......................266  
Contents - Vehicle care  
261  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Car care  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Cleaning and care of the vehicle  
262  
Cleaning and care of the vehicle  
More frequent washings are necessary to deal with  
unfavorable conditions; for example, near the ocean, in  
industrial areas (smoke, exhaust emissions), or during  
winter operation.  
Warning!  
Many cleaning products can be hazardous. Some  
are poisonous, others are flammable. Always follow  
the instructions on the particular container.  
Always open your car’s doors or windows when  
cleaning the inside.  
You should check your vehicle from time to time for  
stone chipping or other damage. Any damage should be  
repaired as soon as possible to prevent the start of  
corrosion.  
Never use fluids or solvents that are not designed  
for cleaning your car.  
In doing so, do not neglect the underside of the vehicle.  
A prerequisite for a thorough check is a washing of the  
underbody followed by a thorough inspection. Damaged  
areas need to be reundercoated.  
In operation, your vehicle is subjected to varying  
external influences which, if gone unchecked, can  
attack the paintwork as well as the underbody and  
cause lasting damage.  
Your vehicle has been treated at the factory with a wax-  
base rustproofing in the body cavities which will last for  
the lifetime of the vehicle. Post-production treatment is  
neither necessary nor recommended by Mercedes-Benz  
because of the possibility of incompatibility between  
materials used in the production process and others  
applied later.  
Such damage is caused not only by extreme and varying  
climatic conditions, but also by air pollution, road salt,  
tar, gravel and stone chipping. Grease and oil, fuel,  
coolant, brake fluid, bird droppings, insects, tree resins  
etc. should be removed immediately to avoid paint  
damage. Frequent washing reduces and/or eliminates  
the aggressiveness and potency of the above adverse  
influences.  
We have selected car-care products and compiled  
recommendations which are specially matched to our  
vehicles and which always reflect the latest technology.  
You can obtain Mercedes-Benz approved car-care  
products at your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Scratches, corrosive deposits, corrosion or damage due  
to negligent or incorrect care cannot always be removed  
or repaired with the car-care products recommended  
here. In such cases it is best to seek aid at your  
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.  
Tar stains  
Quickly remove tar stains before they dry and become  
more difficult to remove. A tar remover is  
recommended.  
The following topics deal with the cleaning and care of  
your vehicle and give important “how-to” information as  
well as references to Mercedes-Benz approved car-care  
products.  
Paintwork, painted body components  
Mercedes-Benz approved Paint Care should be applied  
when water drops on the paint surface to not “bead up”;  
normally in 3 to 5 months, depending on climate and  
washing detergent used.  
Additional information can be found in the booklet titled  
Vehicle Care Guide”.  
Mercedes-Benz approved Paint Cleaner should be  
applied if paint surface shows signs of dirt embedding  
(i.e. loss of gloss).  
Power washer  
When using a power washer for cleaning the vehicle  
always observe manufacturers’ operating instructions.  
Do not apply any of these products or wax if your car is  
parked in the sun or if the hood is still hot.  
Caution!  
Use the appropriate MB-Touch-Up Stick for quick and  
provisional repairs of minor paint damage (i.e. chips  
from stones, car doors, etc.).  
Never use a round nozzle to power wash tires. The  
intense jet of water can result in damage to the tire.  
Always replace a damaged tire.  
Always keep the jet of water moving across the surface.  
Do not aim directly at soft top, electrical parts, electrical  
connectors, seals, or other rubber parts.  
Cleaning and care of the vehicle  
263  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Cleaning and care of the vehicle  
Engine cleaning  
264  
If the vehicle has been run through an automatic car  
wash – in particular one of the older installations -  
rewipe the recessed sections in the taillamps (designed  
to prevent soiling) if necessary. No solvents (fuels,  
thinners etc.) must be used.  
Prior to cleaning the engine compartment make sure to  
protect electrical components and connectors from the  
intrusion of water and cleaning agents.  
Corrosion protection, such as MB Anticorrosion Wax  
should be applied to the engine compartment after  
every engine cleaning. Before applying, all control  
linkage bushings and joints should be lubricated. The  
poly-V-belt and all pulleys should be protected from any  
wax.  
In the winter thoroughly remove all traces of road salt  
as soon as possible.  
When washing the underbody, do not forget to clean the  
inner sides of the wheels.  
Ornamental moldings  
Vehicle washing  
For regular cleaning and care of very dirty chrome-  
plated parts, use a chrome cleaner.  
Do not use hot water or wash your vehicle in direct  
sunlight. Use only a mild car wash detergent, such as  
Mercedes-Benz approved Car Shampoo.  
Headlamps, taillamps, turn signal lenses  
Thoroughly spray the vehicle with a diffused jet of  
water. Direct only a very weak spray towards the  
ventilation intake. Use plenty of water and rinse the  
sponge and chamois frequently.  
Use a mild car wash detergent such as Mercedes-Benz  
approved Car Shampoo, with plenty of water.  
To prevent scratches, never apply strong force and use  
only a soft, non-scratchy cloth when cleaning the lenses.  
Do not attempt to wipe dirty lenses with a dry cloth or  
sponge.  
Rinse with clear water and thoroughly wipe dry with a  
chamois. Do not allow cleaning agents to dry on the  
finish.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Window cleaning  
Instrument cluster  
Use a window cleaning solution on all glass surfaces. An  
automotive glass cleaner is recommended.  
Use a gentle dishwashing detergent or mild detergent  
for delicate fabrics as a washing solution. Wipe with a  
cloth moistened in lukewarm solution. Do not use  
scouring agents.  
Note:  
For safety reasons, switch off wiper and remove key  
from steering lock before cleaning the windshield,  
otherwise the wiper motor can suddenly turn on and  
cause injury.  
Steering wheel and gear selector lever  
Wipe with a damp cloth and dry thoroughly or clean  
with Mercedes-Benz approved Leather Care.  
Light alloy wheels  
Cup holder  
Mercedes-Benz approved Wheel Care should be used for  
regular cleaning of the light alloy wheels.  
Use a gentle dishwashing detergent or mild detergent  
for delicate fabrics as a washing solution. Wipe with a  
cloth moistened in lukewarm solution. Do not use  
scouring agents.  
If possible, clean wheels once a week with  
Mercedes-Benz approved Wheel Care, using a soft  
bristle brush and a strong spray of water.  
Note:  
Follow instructions on container.  
Note:  
For ease of cleaning, the cup holder between the front  
seats can be removed by pulling it up when in its closed  
position.  
Use only acid-free cleaning materials. The acid could  
lead to corrosion.  
Cleaning and care of the vehicle  
265  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Cleaning and care of the vehicle  
Seat belts  
266  
Dry cleaning:  
Brush top (always from front to rear) with a soft-bristled  
brush.  
The webbing must not be treated with chemical  
cleaning agents. Use only clear, lukewarm water and  
soap. Do not dry the webbing at temperatures above  
176°F (80°C) or in direct sunlight.  
Wet cleaning:  
Brush the dry top. Wash with a mild detergent and an  
ample supply of lukewarm water by wiping with a soft-  
bristled brush or sponge from front to rear. Then rinse  
thoroughly with clear water.  
Warning!  
Do not bleach or dye seat belts as this may severely  
weaken them. In a crash they may not be able to  
provide adequate protection.  
If only parts of the top have been washed, wet the entire  
top and allow it to air-dry before lowering it into the  
storage compartment.  
Headliner, shelf behind roll bars, and other hard  
plastic trim items  
Wipe the rear window with a cloth soaked with a mild,  
non-abrasive detergent, rinse and rub dry.  
Pour Mercedes-Benz approved Interior Care onto soft  
lint-free cloth and apply with light pressure.  
Do not use sharp-edged instruments for the removal of  
ice and snow.  
Soft top  
Notes:  
Never run the vehicle through an automatic car wash  
with the soft top in place or use a power washer to clean  
it, as you may damage the soft top material.  
Clean soft top with soft top raised and locked. Lower the  
soft top into the storage compartment only if the top is  
completely dry. If the top is kept in the storage  
compartment for a lengthy period, raise it and air it out  
with the windows down about every 4 months.  
Remove bird droppings immediately. The organic acid  
damages the material and causes the soft top to leak.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
In general, regular spraying or cleansing with clear  
water is sufficient to keep the top clean.  
Wind screen  
Use only water or mild detergent to clean the wind  
screen.  
Wash the top only when heavily soiled.  
Light colored soft tops should be cleaned frequently to  
prevent spots and dirt from setting in, which could stain  
and discolor the soft top material permanently.  
Automatic antenna  
For trouble-free operation of the automatic antenna, we  
recommend that you clean the antenna mast  
periodically.  
Caution!  
Never use any gasoline, thinner, tar and stain removers,  
glass cleaner, or similar organic solvents to clean the  
soft top, plastic window or wind screen. They will cause  
damage which is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz  
Limited Warranty.  
Wiper blade  
Clean the wiper blade rubber with a clean cloth and  
detergent solution.  
Headliner  
Note:  
Soft top:  
For safety reasons, remove key from steering lock before  
cleaning the wiper blade, otherwise the wiper motor  
can suddenly turn on and cause injury.  
Clean with soft bristle brush, or use a dry-shampoo  
cleaner in case of excessive dirt.  
Headlamp cleaning system  
The condition of the wiper blades is important for  
satisfactory cleaning of the headlamp lenses. We  
therefore recommend that the blades be inspected  
regularly.  
Cleaning and care of the vehicle  
267  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Cleaning and care of the vehicle  
Leather upholstery  
268  
Plastic and rubber parts  
Using aftermarket seat covers or wearing clothing that  
have the tendency to give off coloring (e.g. when wet  
etc.) may cause the upholstery to become permanently  
discolored. By lining the seats with a proper  
intermediate cover, contact-discoloration will be  
prevented.  
Do not use oil or wax on these parts.  
Illuminated door sill panels  
Use a gentle dish-washing detergent or mild detergent  
for delicate fabrics as a washing solution. Wipe with a  
cloth moistened in lukewarm solution. Do not use  
scouring agents.  
Wipe leather upholstery with a damp cloth and dry  
thoroughly or clean with Mercedes-Benz approved  
Leather Care. Exercise particular care when cleaning  
perforated leather as its underside should not become  
wet.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc. -  
Technical data  
capacities ...................................277  
Engine oils ...................................... 279  
Engine oil additives ......................279  
Air conditioner refrigerant ..........279  
Brake fluid ...................................... 279  
Premium unleaded gasoline ........280  
Fuel requirements ........................ 280  
Gasoline additives ......................... 281  
Coolants .......................................... 281  
Consumer information ................. 283  
Spare parts service ........................270  
Warranty coverage .........................270  
Identification labels .......................271  
Layout of poly-V-belt drive ............272  
Engine ..............................................273  
Rims - Tires .....................................274  
Weights ............................................276  
Main Dimensions ...........................276  
Contents - Technical data  
269  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Technical data  
270  
Spare parts service  
Warranty coverage  
All authorized Mercedes-Benz Centers maintain a stock  
of original spare parts required for maintenance and  
repair work. In addition, strategically located parts  
distribution centers provide quick and reliable parts  
service.  
Your vehicle is covered under the terms of the  
“warranties” printed in the Service and Warranty  
Information booklet and your authorized  
Mercedes-Benz Center will exchange or repair any  
defective parts originally installed on the vehicle in  
accordance with the terms of the following warranties:  
More than 300 000 different spare parts, for  
Mercedes-Benz models, are available.  
1. New vehicle limited warranty  
2. Emission system warranty  
3. Emission performance warranty  
Mercedes-Benz original spare parts are subjected to  
stringent quality inspections. Each part has been  
specifically developed, manufactured or selected for and  
adapted to Mercedes-Benz vehicles.  
4. California, Massachusetts, and Vermont emission  
control systems warranty  
Therefore, Mercedes-Benz original spare parts should  
be installed.  
Replacement parts and accessories are covered by the  
Mercedes-Benz Spare Parts and Accessories warranties,  
copies of which are available at any Mercedes-Benz  
Center.  
Important!  
The use of non-genuine parts and accessories not  
authorized by Mercedes-Benz could damage the vehicle  
which damage is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz  
Limited Warranty or compromise its durability or safety.  
Loss of Service and  
Warranty Information Booklet  
Should you lose your Service and Warranty Information  
booklet, have your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center  
arrange for a replacement. It will be mailed to you.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Identification labels  
1 Certification label  
2 VIN, visible (lower edge of windshield)  
3 Vehicle Identification No. (VIN)  
4 Engine number  
(left door pillar)  
Note:  
When ordering spare parts, please specify vehicle  
identification and engine numbers.  
5 Body number and paintwork number  
6 Emission control label  
7 Information label  
California version  
Vacuum line routing for emission control system  
Technical data  
271  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Technical data  
272  
Layout of poly-V-belt drive  
SL 500  
SL 600  
1 Automatic belt tensioner  
2 Crankshaft  
5 Generator (alternator)  
6 Idler pulley  
3 Air conditioner compressor  
7 Power steering pump  
8 Air pump  
4 SL 500: Coolant pump  
SL 600: Fan  
9 Coolant pump  
For dimensions of the poly-V-belts, see page 273.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Technical data  
Model  
SL 500 (129.068)1  
SL 600 (129.076)1  
Engine  
113  
120  
Mode of operation  
4-stroke engine,  
gasoline injection  
4-stroke engine,  
gasoline injection  
No. of cylinders  
Bore  
8
12  
3.82 in (97.00 mm)  
3.30 in (84.00 mm)  
303 cu.in. (4966 cm3)  
8.8:1  
3.50 in (89.00 mm)  
3.16 in (80.20 mm)  
365.4 cu.in. (5987 cm3)  
10:1  
Stroke  
Total piston displacement  
Compression ratio  
Output acc.  
to SAE J 1349  
302 hp/5600 rpm  
(225 kW/5600 rpm)  
389 hp/5200 rpm  
(290 kW/5200 rpm)  
Maximum torque acc.  
to SAE J 1349  
339ft.lb/2750 rpm  
(460 Nm/2750 rpm)  
420ft.lb/3800 rpm  
(570 Nm/3800 rpm)  
Maximum engine speed  
Firing order  
6000 rpm  
6000 rpm  
1-5-4-2-6-3-7-8  
2390 mm  
1-12-5-8-3-10-6-7-2-11-4-9  
2585 mm  
Poly-V-belts length  
1
The quoted data apply only to the standard vehicle. See an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for the corresponding data of all special bodies  
and special equipment.  
Technical data  
273  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Technical data  
274  
Rims – Tires  
Rims and summer tires  
(except Sport Package)  
Spare wheel  
Rim (light alloy)  
Wheel offset:  
81/4 J x 17 H 2  
1.33 in (34 mm)  
Rims (light alloy)  
Wheel offset:  
81/4 J x 17 H 2  
1.33 in (34 mm)  
All season tires:  
Radial-ply tires  
245/45 R 17 95 W2  
All season tires:  
Radial-ply tires  
245/45 R17 95 W  
Winter tires:  
Radial-ply tires  
245/45 R 17 45 H M+S2  
2
Must only be used with special MB authorized snow chains.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Rims and summer tires  
(Sport package)  
Model  
SL 500  
SL 600  
Rims front axle  
AMG light alloy rims  
Wheel offset:  
81/2 J x 18 H 2  
1.0 in (25 mm)  
81/2 J x 18 H 2  
1.0 in (25 mm)  
Rims rear axle  
AMG light alloy rims  
Wheel offset:  
91/2 J x 18 H 2  
0.9 in (23 mm)  
10 J x 18 H 2  
1.0 in (25 mm)  
Radial-ply tires  
front axle  
rear axle  
245/40 ZR 18  
275/35 ZR 183  
245/40 ZR 18  
275/35 ZR 183  
Spare wheel  
Rim (light alloy)  
Wheel offset:  
81/4 J x 17 H 2  
1.33 in (34 mm)  
81/4 J x 17 H 2  
1.33 in (34 mm)  
All season tire:  
Radial-ply tire  
245/45 R 17 95W2  
245/45 R 17 95W2  
2
3
Must only be used with special MB authorized snow chains.  
Must not be used with snow chains.  
Technical data  
275  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Technical data  
276  
Electrical system  
Weights  
(see certification tag)  
Generator (alternator)  
Battery  
14 V/150 A  
12V/100 Ah  
Hardtop load max.  
Trunk load max.  
66 lb (30 kg)  
220 lb (100 kg)  
Starter motor  
SL 500:  
SL 600:  
12V/1.7 kW  
12V/2.2 kW  
Main dimensions  
Spark plugs  
SL 500:  
Bosch F 8 DPER  
Beru 14 FGH 8 DPUR X 2  
Overall vehicle length  
Overall vehicle width  
Overall height  
Wheel base  
177.1 in (4499 mm)  
71.3 in (1812 mm)  
51.3 in (1303 mm)  
99.0 in (2515 mm)  
60.4 in (1535 mm)  
60.0 in (1523 mm)  
SL 600:  
Beru 14 FGH 8 DPUR X 2  
Electrode gap  
Tightening torque  
0.039 in (1.0 mm)  
15 – 22 ft.lb (20 – 30 Nm)  
Track, front  
Track, rear  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc. - capacities  
Vehicle components and their respective lubricants must match. Therefore use only brands tested and recommended  
by us. Please refer to the Factory Approved Service Products pamphlet, or inquire at your Mercedes-Benz Center.  
Model  
Capacity  
Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc.  
Engine with oil filter  
SL 500  
SL 600  
8.5 US qt (8.0 l)  
10.6 US qt (10.0 l)  
Recommended engine oils  
Automatic transmission  
Rear axle  
9.6 US qt (9.1 l)  
1.5 US qt (1.4 l)  
Automatic transmission fluid  
Hypoid gear oil SAE 90, 85 W 90  
Hydraulic system for  
adaptive damping  
system (ADS)  
approx. 4.8 US qt (4.5 l)  
MB Hydraulic fluid  
Power steering  
Front wheel hubs  
Brake system  
approx. 1.1 US qt (1.0 l)  
approx. 2.1 oz (60 g) each  
approx. 0.5 US qt (0.5 l)  
MB Power steering fluid  
High temperature roller bearing grease  
MB Brake fluid (DOT 4)  
Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc. - capacities  
Instruments  
277  
Instrument  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
and controls  
cluster display  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc. - capacities  
Model  
278  
Capacity  
Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc.  
Windshield washer  
and/headlamp cleaning  
system  
Vehicles without ADS:  
approx. 5.3 US qt (5.0 l)  
MB Windshield washer concentrate “S” 1  
Vehicles with ADS:  
approx. 3.2 US qt (3.0 l)  
Cooling system  
SL 500  
SL 600  
approx. 13.2 US qt (12.5 l)  
approx. 21.1 US qt (20.0 l)  
MB Anticorrosion/antifreeze  
Fuel tank  
including a reserve of  
approx. 21.1 US gal (80.0 l)  
approx. 2.6 US gal (10.0 l)  
Premium unleaded gasoline:  
Posted octane 91 (Avg. of 96 RON/86 MON)  
Air conditioner system  
R-134a refrigerant and special PAC lubricant  
(Never R-12)  
1
Use MB Windshield Washer Concentrate “S” and water for temperatures above freezing or MB Windshield Washer Concentrate “S” and  
commercially available premixed windshield washer solvent/antifreeze for temperatures below freezing. Follow suggested mixing ratios,  
see page 226.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Engine oils  
Air conditioner refrigerant  
Engine oils are specifically tested for their suitability in  
our engines. Therefore, use only engine oils  
recommended by Mercedes-Benz. Information on  
recommended brands is available at your authorized  
Mercedes-Benz Center.  
R-134a (HFC) refrigerant and special PAG lubricating oil  
is used in the air conditioner system.  
Never use R-12 (CFC) or mineral-based lubricating oil,  
otherwise damage to the system will occur.  
Please follow Service Booklet recommendations for  
scheduled oil changes. Failure to do so could result in  
engine damage not covered by the Mercedes-Benz  
Limited Warranty.  
Brake fluid  
During vehicle operation, the boiling point of the brake  
fluid is continuously reduced through the absorption of  
moisture from the atmosphere. Under extremely hard  
operating conditions, this moisture content can lead to  
the formation of bubbles in the system thus reducing  
the system‘s efficiency.  
Engine oil additives  
Do not blend oil additives with engine oil. They may be  
harmful to the engine operation.  
The brake fluid must therefore be replaced every two  
years, preferably in the spring.  
Damage or malfunctions resulting from blending oil  
additives are not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited  
Warranty.  
It is recommended to use only brake fluid approved by  
Mercedes-Benz. Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center  
will provide you with additional information.  
Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc. - capacities  
279  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc. - capacities  
280  
Premium unleaded gasoline  
Caution!  
Fuel requirements  
Use only Premium unleaded meeting ASTM  
standard D 439:  
To maintain the engine’s durability and performance,  
premium unleaded gasoline must be used. If premium  
unleaded is not available and low octane fuel is used,  
follow these precautions:  
The octane number (posted at the pump) must be  
91 min. It is an average of both the Research (R) octane  
number and the Motor (M) octane number: [(R+M)/2].  
This is also known as ANTI-KNOCK INDEX.  
• have the fuel tank filled only partially with unleaded  
regular and fill up with premium unleaded as soon  
as possible,  
Unleaded gasoline containing oxygenates such as  
Ethanol, IPA, IBA and TBA can be used provided the  
ratio of any one of these oxygenates to gasoline does not  
exceed 10%, MTBE not to exceed 15%.  
• avoid full throttle driving and abrupt acceleration,  
• do not exceed an engine speed of 3000 rpm, if the  
vehicle is loaded with a light load such as two  
persons and no luggage,  
• do not exceed 2/3 of maximum accelerator pedal  
position, if the vehicle is fully loaded or operating in  
mountainous terrain.  
The ratio of Methanol to gasoline must not exceed 3%  
plus additional cosolvents.  
Using mixtures of Ethanol and Methanol is not allowed.  
Gasohol, which contains 10% Ethanol and 90% unleaded  
gasoline, can be used.  
These blends must also meet all other fuel requirements  
such as resistance to spark knock, boiling range, vapor  
pressure etc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Gasoline additives  
Coolants  
A major concern among engine manufacturers is carbon  
build up caused by gasoline. Mercedes-Benz  
The engine coolant is a mixture of water and  
anticorrosion/antifreeze, which provides:  
recommends the use of only quality gasoline containing  
additives that prevent the build up of carbon deposits.  
• corrosion protection,  
• freeze protection,  
After an extended period of using fuels without such  
additives, carbon deposits can build up especially on the  
intake valves and in the combustion area, leading to  
engine performance problems such as:  
• boiling protection (by increasing the boiling point).  
The cooling system was filled at the factory with a  
coolant providing freeze protection to approximately  
-22°F (-30°C) and corrosion protection.  
• warm-up hesitation,  
• unstable idle,  
• knocking/pinging,  
• misfire,  
If the antifreeze mixture is effective to -22°F (-30°C), the  
boiling point of the coolant in the pressurized cooling  
system is reached at approx. 266°F (130°C).  
The coolant solution must be used year round to provide  
the necessary corrosion protection and increase in the  
boil-over protection. You should have it replaced every  
3 years.  
• power loss.  
Do not blend other specific fuel additives with fuel.  
They only result in unnecessary cost, and may be  
harmful to the engine operation.  
To provide the important corrosion protection, the  
solution must be at least 45% anticorrosion/antifreeze  
(equals a freeze protection to approx. - 22°F [-30°C]). If  
you use a solution that is more than 55% anticorrosion/  
antifreeze (freeze protection to approx. - 49°F [-45°C]),  
Damage or malfunctions resulting from poor fuel  
quality or from blending specific fuel additives are not  
covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.  
Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc. - capacities  
281  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc. - capacities  
282  
the engine temperature will increase due to the lower  
heat transfer capability of the solution. Therefore, do not  
use more than this amount of anticorrosion/antifreeze.  
Before the start of the winter season (or once a year in  
the hot southern regions), you should have the  
anticorrosion/antifreeze concentration checked. The  
coolant is also regularly checked each time you bring  
your vehicle to your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center  
for service.  
If the coolant level is low, water and MB anticorrosion/  
antifreeze should be used to bring it up to the proper  
level (have cooling system checked for signs of leakage).  
Anticorrosion/antifreeze quantity  
The water in the cooling system must meet minimum  
requirements, which are usually satisfied by normal  
drinking water. If your are not sure about the water  
quality, consult your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.  
Model  
Approx. freeze protection  
-35°F  
(-37°C)  
-49°F  
(-45°C)  
Anticorrosion/antifreeze  
SL 500  
SL 600  
6.6 US qt  
(6.25 l)  
7.3 US qt  
(6.9 l)  
Your vehicle contains a number of aluminum parts. The  
use of aluminum components in motor vehicle engines  
necessitates that anticorrosion/antifreeze coolant used  
in such engines be specifically formulated to protect the  
aluminum parts. (Failure to use such anticorrosion/  
antifreeze coolant will result in a significantly  
shortened service life.)  
10.6 US qt  
(10.0 l)  
11. 6 U S qt  
(11.0 l)  
Therefore the following product is strongly  
recommended for use in your car: Mercedes-Benz  
anticorrosion/antifreeze Agent.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Consumer information  
may depart significantly from the norm due to  
variations in driving habits, service practices and  
differences in road characteristics and climate.  
This has been prepared as required of all manufactures  
of passenger cars under Title 49, Code of U.S. Federal  
Regulations, Part 575 pursuant to the “National Traffic  
and Motor Vehicle Safety Act of 1966”.  
Traction  
The traction grades, from highest to lowest are AA, A, B,  
and C. Those grades represent the tire’s ability to stop  
on wet pavement as measured under controlled  
conditions on specified government test surfaces of  
asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor  
traction performance.  
Uniform tire quality grading  
Quality grades can be found where applicable on the  
tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum  
section width. For example:  
Warning!  
Tread wear 200 Traction AA  
Temperature A  
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on  
straightahead braking traction tests, and does not  
include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or  
peak traction characteristics.  
All passenger car tires must conform to federal safety  
requirements in addition to these grades.  
Treadwear  
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on  
the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled  
conditions on a specified government test course. For  
example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half  
(1 1/2) times as well on the government course as a tire  
graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends  
upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and  
Consumer information  
283  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Consumer information  
284  
Temperature  
Warning!  
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,  
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of  
heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under  
controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory  
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the  
material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life,  
and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire  
failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of  
The temperature grade for this tire is established  
for a tire that is properly inflated and not  
overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or  
excessive loading, either separately or in  
combination, can cause excessive heat build up  
and possible tire failure.  
performance which all passenger car tires must meet  
under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard  
No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of  
performance on the laboratory test wheel than the  
minimum required by law.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CD changer ................................................................. 110  
CD mode .....................................................................109  
Operating and display elements ...............................99  
Operating safety ..........................................................98  
Operation ............................................................. 98, 102  
Radio mode ................................................................104  
Telephone operation ................................................. 113  
Automatic climate control ..............................................90  
Air distribution ............................................................95  
Air recirculation ..........................................................96  
Air volume ....................................................................95  
Basic setting - automatic mode .................................93  
Defogging windows .....................................................94  
Defrosting .....................................................................94  
Display and controls ...................................................92  
Dust filter .....................................................................97  
Rear window defroster ...............................................95  
Residual engine heat utilization ...............................96  
Automatic transmission ................................................168  
Emergency operation ............................................... 174  
Fluid level .................................................................. 222  
Maneuvering ..............................................................172  
Program mode selector switch ................................173  
Selector lever positions ............................................169  
Index  
A
ABS (Antilock brake system) ....................................... 190  
Malfunction indicator lamp .....................................208  
Adjusting steering column  
Storing steering column  
position in memory ...............................................70  
ADS indicator lamp ....................................................... 212  
ADS warning lamp ......................................................... 212  
Air conditioner refrigerant ...........................................279  
Airbags ..............................................................................60  
Airbag OFF indicator lamp ...................................... 213  
SRS indicator lamp ...................................................206  
Antenna ........................................................................... 151  
Antilock brake system (ABS) ....................................... 190  
Antitheft alarm system ...................................................42  
Aquaplaning ...................................................................180  
Armrest ...........................................................................127  
Ashtrays ..................................................................130, 131  
Audio system  
Anti-theft system ......................................................100  
Button and soft key operation ................................. 101  
Cassette mode ...........................................................106  
Index  
285  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Index  
286  
Remote control – changing batteries .................... 252  
Vehicle keys .................................................................28  
Changing wheels ............................................................231  
Charge indicator lamp ................................................... 211  
Check engine  
malfunction indicator lamp .................................... 204  
Check regularly and before a long trip ...................... 202  
Checking engine oil level ............................................ 222  
Checking engine oil level indicator ..............................82  
Cleaning and care of the vehicle ................................ 262  
Clock ..................................................................................79  
Combination switch .........................................................86  
Console storage compartments ....................................127  
Consumer information ................................................. 283  
B
BabySmartTM airbag deactivation system .....................58  
Self-test .........................................................................58  
Backrest .............................................................................48  
BAS (Brake assist system) ............................................188  
Malfunction indicator lamp .....................................207  
Battery .............................................................................237  
Charge indicator lamp .............................................. 211  
Recycling ....................................................................238  
Brake assist system (BAS) ............................................188  
Brake fluid ......................................................................279  
Capacity ......................................................................277  
Brake pad wear indicator lamp ....................................205  
Brake warning lamp ......................................................205  
Control and operation of  
radio transmitters .....................................................154  
Coolant  
C
Adding coolant .......................................................... 225  
Anticorrosion/antifreeze quantity ........................ 282  
Checking level .......................................................... 224  
Coolants ......................................................................281  
Low engine coolant level  
Catalytic converter ........................................................ 163  
Central locking system ...................................................29  
Automatic central locking .........................................37  
Central locking switch ...............................................36  
General notes ...............................................................33  
Locking and unlocking  
warning lamp ....................................................... 209  
Temperature gauge .....................................................78  
Cruise control .................................................................184  
Cup holder ..............................................................128, 265  
with remote control ...............................................30  
Remote control ..................................................... 28, 29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Emergency unlocking in  
D
case of accident ...........................................................37  
Emission control ............................................................164  
Engine compartment .................................................... 220  
Engine oil  
Additives .................................................................... 279  
Capacities .................................................................. 277  
Checking level .......................................................... 222  
Consumption ................................................................83  
Engine oils ................................................................. 279  
Low level warning lamp ...........................................210  
Engine oil level indicator ................................................82  
Engine oil temperature gauge ........................................83  
Entrance lamps in footwells,  
exit lamps in doors ...................................................120  
ESP (Electronic Stability Program) .............................192  
Control Switch ...........................................................194  
Malfunction indicator lamp .................................... 207  
Synchronizing ...........................................................193  
Warning lamp ........................................................... 207  
ETR (Emergency tensioning retractor) .........................59  
SRS indicator lamp .................................................. 206  
Exterior lamp switch .......................................................84  
Exterior lamps ............................................................... 243  
Adjusting headlamp aim ......................................... 248  
Bulb for high and low beam ................................... 245  
Display illumination ........................................................77  
Door control panel ...........................................................20  
Door pockets ...................................................................129  
Doors ..................................................................................34  
Drinking and Driving .....................................................176  
Drive sensibly - Save Fuel .............................................176  
Driving instructions .......................................................176  
Block heater ...............................................................183  
Brakes .........................................................................177  
Deep water .................................................................182  
Pedals ...........................................................................176  
Traveling abroad .......................................................183  
Winter driving ...........................................................182  
Driving off .......................................................................178  
E
Economy ............................................................................93  
Electronic stability program (ESP) .............................. 192  
Emergency call  
See Tele Aid ...............................................................156  
Emergency tensioning retractor (ETR) .........................59  
Emergency trunk lid release button .............................40  
Index  
287  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Index  
288  
Failure indicator lamp .............................................. 211  
Headlamp assembly (Halogen) ...............................244  
Headlamp assembly (Xenon) ..................................246  
License plate lamps ..................................................251  
Replacing bulbs .........................................................243  
Taillamp assemblies .................................................250  
G
Garage door opener .......................................................133  
Gasoline  
Additives .....................................................................281  
Fuel requirements ................................................... 280  
Premium unleaded .................................................. 280  
Turn signal, parking,  
side marker and standing lamp .........................245  
H
F
Hardtop  
Attaching hardtop .....................................................140  
Removing ....................................................................137  
Hardtop or panorama roof ............................................137  
Hazard warning flasher switch .....................................89  
Head restraints .................................................................44  
Headlamp assembly (Halogen) ................................... 244  
Headlamp cleaning system .............................................87  
High beam indicator lamp ............................................213  
Hood ................................................................................ 220  
First aid kit ..................................................................... 216  
Flexible service system (FSS) ........................................80  
FSS indicator lamp .....................................................77  
Fuel consumption gauge .................................................83  
Fuel filler flap, manual release ...................................260  
Fuel requirements .........................................................280  
Fuel reserve and  
fuel cap placement warning ....................................207  
Fuel supply .....................................................................200  
Fuels, coolants, lubricants  
etc. - capacities ..........................................................277  
Fuses ................................................................................ 219  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
I
J
Identification labels .......................................................271  
Illuminated vanity mirror ............................................123  
Indicator lamps in the  
Jump starting ................................................................. 239  
K
instrument cluster ..............................................76, 204  
Infant and Child Restraint Systems  
Keys ....................................................................................28  
Master key ....................................................................28  
SRS indicator lamp ...................................................206  
Infant and child restraint systems ................................68  
Information call  
See Tele Aid ...............................................................156  
Instrument cluster ........................................................... 74  
Display illumination ...................................................77  
Indicator lamps ........................................................... 76  
Instrument lamps .......................................................77  
Malfunction and indicator lamps ...........................204  
Instruments and controls ............................................... 18  
Interior  
L
Layout of poly-V-belt drive ........................................... 272  
Leather upholstery ........................................................ 268  
Level control system ......................................................196  
Lighter ............................................................................. 131  
Locking the vehicle ..........................................................30  
General notes .............................................................124  
Interior central locking system ...................................125  
M
Integration with vehicle  
Maintenance ...................................................................155  
Malfunction lamps  
in the instrument cluster ........................................ 204  
Multicontour seats ...........................................................49  
central locking system ........................................126  
Separate locking of  
storage compartments .........................................126  
Interior lamps .................................................................120  
Interior lighting .............................................................120  
Index  
289  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Index  
290  
Product information ..........................................................7  
N
Night security illumination ...........................................85  
R
Radio and telephone ......................................................154  
Rain sensor .......................................................................87  
Raising soft top manually ............................................ 254  
Reading lamps ................................................................120  
Rear storage compartment ............................................129  
Rear view mirrors ............................................................ 71  
Exterior .........................................................................72  
Inside ............................................................................ 71  
Remote control .................................................................28  
Changing batteries .................................................. 252  
Synchronizing .......................................................... 253  
Replacement keys  
Obtaining replacement keys .....................................29  
Replacing wiper blade .................................................. 258  
Roadside assistance call  
See Tele Aid ...............................................................156  
Roll bar ............................................................................ 118  
Roll bar warning lamp ...................................................212  
O
Odometer display field ....................................................82  
On-board diagnostic system .........................................204  
Opening the trunk ........................................................... 31  
Outside temperature indicator ......................................78  
P
Panic button ......................................................................32  
Parcel net in passenger footwell .................................128  
Parking ............................................................................178  
Parking brake .................................................................175  
Brake warning lamp .................................................205  
Passenger airbag indicator lamp ................................. 213  
Power assistance ............................................................177  
Power sunshade .............................................................122  
Power windows ................................................................116  
Express opening ........................................................117  
Opening with key ........................................................ 41  
Problems with your vehicle ........................................... 14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Starting and turning off the engine ............................167  
Steering column  
Adjusting ......................................................................70  
Steering lock ...................................................................165  
S
Safety guidelines for the seat belt,  
emergency tensioning retractor  
and airbag ....................................................................67  
Seat belt nonusage warning system .............................53  
Seat belts ...........................................................................52  
Fastening ......................................................................54  
Unfastening ..................................................................56  
Warning lamp ............................................................206  
Seat belts and integrated  
restraint system ..........................................................52  
Seats ...................................................................................44  
Seat heater ...................................................................50  
Snow chains .................................................................... 181  
Soft top ............................................................................143  
Lowering .....................................................................144  
Raising ........................................................................145  
SOS-call  
See Tele Aid ...............................................................156  
Spare parts service ........................................................270  
Spare wheel ....................................................................229  
SRS (Supplemental restraint system) ...........................59  
Indicator lamp ...........................................................206  
Start lock-out ....................................................................33  
Malfunction lamp ........................................................77  
Storage compartment  
(eyeglasses compartment)  
in the dashboard .......................................................124  
Stowing things in the vehicle ...................................... 216  
Sun visors ........................................................................123  
Sunshade, electrical ......................................................122  
Sunshade, manual .........................................................121  
Supplemental restraint system (SRS) ...........................59  
Synchronizing power windows .................................... 117  
T
Tachometer ........................................................................79  
Taillamp assemblies ..................................................... 250  
Technical ........................................................................ 273  
Technical data ................................................................ 273  
Electrical system .......................................................276  
Main dimensions ......................................................276  
Rims – Tires ...............................................................274  
Weights .......................................................................276  
Tele Aid ............................................................................156  
Index  
291  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Index  
292  
Information ................................................................160  
Initiating an emergency call ...................................158  
Roadside Assistance .................................................159  
Telephone, general ........................................................ 132  
Telephones and two-way radio .....................................154  
The first 1 000 miles (1 500 km) ................................155  
Tires  
Driving instructions .................................................179  
Inflation pressure .....................................................235  
Replacement ..............................................................227  
Speed rating ............................................................... 181  
Traction ......................................................................180  
Tow-away alarm ................................................................43  
Tow-away protection ........................................................43  
Towing the vehicle .........................................................241  
Trip odometer ...................................................................79  
Trunk .................................................................................38  
Trunk lamp .....................................................................260  
Trunk lid  
U
Unlocking the vehicle ......................................................30  
V
Vehicle jack ..................................................................... 218  
Vehicle tools ....................................................................217  
W
Warranty coverage ........................................................ 270  
What you should know  
at the gas station ...................................................... 200  
Wheels ............................................................................ 227  
Changing ....................................................................231  
Rotating ..................................................................... 228  
Spare wheel ............................................................... 229  
Tire replacement ...................................................... 227  
Where to find it ................................................................ 13  
Wind screen ....................................................................148  
Installation .................................................................148  
Removal ......................................................................150  
Setting up ...................................................................150  
Emergency release .....................................................40  
Trunk lid release switch .................................................39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Windshield and headlamp  
washer system  
Check level .................................................................202  
Fluid mixing ratio .....................................................226  
Low fluid level warning lamp ................................. 210  
Windshield washer fluid mixing ratio .........................88  
Wiper blade, replacing ..................................................258  
Index  
293  
Instruments  
and controls  
Instrument  
cluster display  
Technical  
data  
Operation  
Driving  
Practical hints  
Car care  
Index  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Service and Literature  
Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center has trained technicians and original Mercedes-Benz parts to service your  
vehicle properly. For expert advice and quality service, see your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.  
If your are interested in obtaining service literature for your vehicle, please contact your authorized Mercedes-Benz  
Center. We consider this the best way for you to obtain accurate information for your vehicle.  
For further information you can find us on the Mercedes-Benz web-site  
www.mbusa.com  
Warning!  
To help avoid personal injury, be extremely careful when performing any service work or repairs. Improper  
or incomplete service or the use of incorrect or inappropriate parts or materials may damage the vehicle or its  
equipment, which may in turn result in personal injury.  
If you have any question about carrying out some service, turn to the advice of an authorized Mercedes-Benz  
Center.  
We reserve the right to modify the technical details of the vehicle as given in the data and illustrations of this  
Operator’s Manual. Reprinting, translation and copying, even of excerpts, is not permitted without our prior  
authorization in writing.  
Title illustration no. P00.00-2645-26  
Press time 10/31/00  
MBUSA/TI  
Printed in the U.S.A.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Order No. 6515 3040 13 Part No. 129 584 70 82 USA Edition B 2001  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

LaCie Computer Drive LaCinema Rugged HD User Manual
Lenovo Laptop 13 User Manual
Lenovo Tablet 23427YU User Manual
LG Electronics Range LRG3095ST User Manual
Life Fitness Bicycle RT8 User Manual
Logitech Computer Keyboard MK620 User Manual
LOREX Technology Security Camera SG7524 Series User Manual
Margaritaville Blender NBMGDM0900 User Manual
Mellerware Waffle Iron 27300 User Manual
Midland Radio Radio CB 1 User Manual